^ 


> 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0     ^1^  1^ 


I.I 


Ik 

l£& 

■^  1^   12.2 

^    li£    12.0 


im 


IL25  |||||_u   IIIIII.6 


^ 


/w 


/ 


Photographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 


V 


•^ 


:\ 


\ 


^v 
<? 


6^ 


^^ 


>/^ 


'^ 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)  873-4503 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  IVIicroreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiquas 


Tschnical  and  Bibliographic  Notsa/Notet  tachniques  at  bibiiographiquaa 


Tha  Inatituta  haa  attamptad  to  obtain  tha  baat 
orlginsi  copy  availabia  for  filming.  Faaturaa  of  thia 
copy  which  may  ba  bibliographicaily  uniqua. 
which  may  altar  any  of  tha  imagaa  in  tha 
raproduction,  or  which  may  aignificantiy  changa 
tha  uauai  mathod  of  filming,  ara  chackad  balow. 


□    Coloured  covara/ 
Couvertura  da  coulaur 


I     I   Covara  damagad/ 


D 


D 


D 


D 


S 


Couvartura  andommagia 


Covara  raatorad  and/or  iaminatad/ 
Couvartura  raataurte  at/ou  palliculAa 


I      I    Covor  titia  miaaing/ 


La  titra  da  couvartura  manqua 


I      I    Coiourad  mapa/ 


Cartaa  giographiquas  an  coulaur 


Coiourad  ink  (i.e.  othar  than  blua  or  black)/ 
Encra  da  coulaur  (i.9.  autra  qua  biaua  ou  noira) 


I     I   Coiourad  plataa  and/or  illuatrationa/ 


Planchaa  at/ou  illuatrationa  an  coulaur 


Bound  with  othar  matariol/ 
Ralii  avac  d'autraa  documenta 


Tight  binding  may  cauaa  ahadowa  or  diatortion 
along  intarior  margin/ 

La  re  liura  sarrde  paut  cauaar  da  I'ombra  ou  da  la 
diatortion  la  long  da  la  marga  intiriaura 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  se  peut  que  certainea  pagea  blanches  ajouties 
lore  d'une  restauration  apparaisaent  dana  la  texte, 
maia,  lorsqua  cela  6tait  possible,  ces  pagea  n'ont 
paa  M  filmias. 


L'Institut  a  microfilm*  la  meilleur  exemplaire 
qu'il  lui  a  iti  poasibla  de  se  procurer.  Les  details 
de  cet  exemplaire  qui  sent  peut-Atre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographique,  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dana  la  mAthode  normale  de  filmaga 
aont  indiquAa  ci-daaaoua. 


I      I   Coloured  pages/ 


/ 


n 


Pagea  de  couleur 

Pagea  damaged/ 
Pages  endommagias 

Pages  restored  and/oi 

Pages  restaur<ies  et/ou  pelliculAes 

Pagea  discoloured,  stained  or  foxei 
Pages  dicolordes,  tachaties  ou  piqudes 

Pages  detached/ 
Pages  ditachdes 


I      I  Pagea  damaged/ 

I      I  Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 

r~1  Pagea  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 

I      I  Pages  detached/ 


Showthrough/ 
Trp  sparence 


I      I    Juality  of  print  variaa/ 


Quality  inigala  de  I'impression 

Includes  supplementary  material/ 
Comprend  du  material  supplimentaire 

Only  edition  available/ 
Seule  Edition  disponible 


Pagea  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc.,  have  been  refiimed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  image/ 
Les  pages  totalement  ou  partiellement 
obscurcies  par  un  feuillet  d'errata,  une  pelure, 
etc.,  ont  M  filmies  A  nouveau  de  faqon  d 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


I         ■> 


Additional  comments:/ 
Commentaires  supplAmentaires; 


Irregular  pagination  :   [1]  •  82,  [1],  Ixx-lxxxviii  p. 


This  item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  film6  au  taux  de  reduction  indiquA  ci-dessous. 


10X 

14X 

18X 

22X 

26X 

30X 

y 

12X 


16X 


20X 


24X 


28X 


32X 


The  copy  filmed  here  has  been  reproduced  thanks 
to  the  generosity  of: 

Seminary  of  Quebec 
Library 


L'exempiaire  film*  fut  reproduit  grice  A  la 
ginArositA  de: 

SIminaire  de  QuAbee 
Bibliothique 


The  images  appearing  here  are  the  best  quality 
possible  considering  the  condition  and  legibility 
of  the  original  copy  and  In  keeping  with  the 
filming  contract  specifications. 


Las  images  suivantos  ont  it*  reproduites  avec  ie 
plua  grand  soln.  compto  tenu  de  la  condition  at 
de  la  nattet*  de  l'exempiaire  fiimA,  at  en 
conformity  avec  ies  conditions  du  contrat  de 
filmage. 


Original  copies  In  printed  paper  covers  are  filmed 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  Illustrated  imprea* 
sion.  or  the  back  cover  when  appropriata.  All 
other  original  copies  are  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  Impres* 
sion,  and  ending  on  the  last  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  impression. 


The  last  recorded  frame  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  —»>(  meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  Y  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 


Lea  exemplaires  orlglnaux  dont  la  couverture  en 
papier  est  ImprimAe  sont  fiim4s  en  commen^ant 
par  la  premier  plat  at  en  termlnant  solt  par  la 
darniire  page  qui  comporte  une  emprelnte 
d'Impression  ou  d'illustratlon.  soit  par  la  second 
plat,  salon  lo  cas.  Tous  ies  autres  exemplaires 
orlglnaux  sont  film^s  en  commen9ant  par  la 
premiere  page  qui  comporte  une  emprelnte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustratlon  at  en  termlnant  per 
la  darniire  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
emprelnte. 

Un  dee  symboles  sulvants  apparaltra  sur  la 
dernl4re  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  seion  Ie 
caa:  Ie  symbols  — »>  signifie  "A  SUIVRE".  ie 
symbols  V  signifie  "FIN". 


Maps,  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrama  illustrate  the 
method: 


Les  cartes,  planches,  tableeux.  etc..  peuvent  Atre 
filmte  A  das  taux  de  reduction  diffirents. 
Lorsque  ie  document  est  trop  grand  pour  Atre 
reproduit  en  un  seul  cllchA,  ii  est  fiini6  A  partir 
da  Tangle  supArieur  gauche,  de  gauche  h  droite. 
et  de  haut  en  bas,  en  prenant  ie  nombre 
d'images  n^cessaire.  Las  diogrammes  suivants 
illuatrant  la  mithode. 


1 

2 

3 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

^rJ,  JMi^f^U^-  TL  3.  /^.a^t. 


^ 


AS  PI 


37/ 


OBSERVATIONS 


OH  TBS 


LANGUAGE 


OF  TBI 


atvBEiia&^saiBv  sRssiikSi^g^^ 


BY  JONATHAN  EDWARDS,  D.  D. 


A  NEW  EDITION: 


WITH  NOTES, 


BY 


JOHN   PICKERING. 


AS  PUBLISHED  IN  THE  MASSACHUSETTS  HISTORICAL  COLLECTIONS* 


BOSTON: 

PRINTEO   BT  PHELPS  AND   FARHHAM. 

1833. 


f 


.  u 


DR.  EDWARDS' 
OBSERVATIONS   ON  THE   MOH£GAN   LANGUAGE. 


^dvertit  meni  to  the  pmeHl  JSiditioH, 

It  was  the  intention  of  the  Historical  Society  to  have 
published  in  the  present  volume  of  their  Collections  the 
copious  Englith  and  IfU&an  Vocabulary  qfJosiah  Cotton^ 
Esquire,  mentioned  in  their  last  volume.*  At  the  time, 
however,  when  that  was  contemplated,  it  was  not  consid- 
ered, that  a  lar^  part  of  the  present  volume  was  to  be 
reserved  for  a  General  Index  xo  the  ten  volumes,  which 
form  the  Second  Serin  of  the  Collections;  and  this 
IndeXt  together  with  several  articles,  which  had  been  pre- 
pared for  publication,  would  not  allow  sufficient  room  for 
the  whole  of  tlie  manuscript  alluded  to :  It  became  neces- 
sary, therefore,  to  defer  the  publication  of  that  work  for 
the  present.  Bu;,  as  the  attention  of  the  learned,  both  at 
home  and  abroad,  is  now  so  much  engaged  in  the  subject 
of  the  Indian  Languages,  the  Society  have  felt  an  unwil- 
lingness to  intermit  their  co-operation  in  a  department  of 
learning,  which  has  peculiar  claims  upon  eyery  Ameri- 
can. They  have,  therefore,  thought  it  would  be  useful 
to  continue  their  intended  series  of  JwUan  JVactSt  at  this 
time,  by  a  republication  of  Dr.  Edwards'  Obtervationt 
on  the  Language  qf  the  Muhhekaneew  Indians.  This 
short,  but  variable  tract,  was  originally  printed  in  the 
year  1788,  and  was  afterwards  republished  ;t  but  it  is 
again  entirely  out  of  print,  llie  work  has  been  for  some 
time  well  known  in  Europe,  where  it  has  undoubtedly 
contributed  to  the  diffusion  of  more  just  ideas,  than  once 
prevailed,  res|)ecting  the  structure  of  the  Indian  lan- 
guages, and  has  served  to  correct  some  of  the  errours, 
into  which  learned  men  had  been  led  by  placing  too  im- 

*  See  the  Introitutorjf  ObnrtaHoru  to  ElioVt  htdian  Onunmar^  tn  Hut. 
CoUect,  vol.  ix.  p.  S41,  of  the  pteient  series. 

t  Bee  CartjfU  Jhntrican  yir?M«im,  vol.  t.  p.  SS. 

2 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAOFJB. 


Elicit  confidence  in  the  accounts  of  hasty  travellers  and 
lundering  interpreters.  In  the  MiTHaiOATis,  that 
immortal  monument  of  philolofpcal  researoh*^  ProjRcssor 
Vater  refers  to  it  for  the  mformation  he  has  given  upon 
the  Mohegan  language,  and  he  has  publUhol  large  ex- 
tracts from  it.*  The  work,  indeed,  has  the  highest 
claims  to  attention,  from  the  unusually  favourable  cir- 
cumstances, in  which  the  author  was  placed  for  acquiring 
a  thorough  acquaintance  with  the  language,  as  he  has  par* 
ticularl^  stated  in  his  Prtface,  To  a  perfect  fiimiliarity 
with  this  dialect  (which,  it  seems,  he  began  to  learn  at 
six  years  of  age  among  the  natives)  he  united  a  stock  of 
grammatical  and  other  learning,  which  well  qualified  him 
vxt  the  task  of  reducing  an  unwritten  language  to  the 
rules  of  grammar.  But,  though  he  might  have  relied 
upon  his  own  knowledge  alone,  yet  so  extremely  solici- 
tous was  he  to  have  the  work  entirely  free' from  errours* 
that,  lest  his  disuse  of  the  language  for  some  time  might 
possibly  have  exposed  him  to  mistakes,  he  took  pains  to 
CQ^isult  qn  intelligent  chief  of  the  ii  ibe,  (who  was  ac- 
quainted with  English  as  well  as  his  native  language) 
before  he;  woukl  commit  the  work  to  the  press.  Barely 
indeed  does  it  happen  to  any  man  to  be  so  favourably 
circumstanced  for  the  acquisition  of  exact  knowledge  oa 
th^se  subjects;  and  the  present  work  niay  accordingly  be 
regarded  as  a  repository  of  information,  upon  which  the 
reaider  can  place  reUance. 

^  While  the  present  edition  of  the  Observations  was  pre- 
paring for  the  presSf  it  pipQVirred  to  the  editor,  that  the 
learned  author  might  posubly  have  made  a  revision  of 
thfi  work  in  his  lite  time,  and  that  his  corrections  might 
be  in  the  possession  of  bis  descendants.  Application  was 
.ajCj(;ordiiagly  made,  at  the  editor's  request  (by  the  Rev.  Dr. 
Holmes,^*orrespondinff  Secretary  of  the  Society)  to  J.  W. 
Edwards,  ^squire,  of  Hartford,  a  son  oi  the  autfior,  for 
the  purpose  of  obtaining  the  use  <^  a  revised  cc^,  if  any 
such  existed.    It  will  be  seen,  however,  by  the  foUowiog 

*  MUhridatety  vol.  Hi.  part  3,  p.  394,  note.  These  extract!  appear  to 
have  Ibeeft  made  from  the  copy  hi  (Jare^fU  A/mitr,  Jfuttium,  in  whioE  aoioe 
slight  typographical  errours  are  to  be  fooncK 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAOIS.  % 

extract  from  the  reply  of  Mr.  Edwards,  that  no  entire 
reviuon  of  the  work  was  ever  made,  with  a  view  to  re- 
publication, but  only  a  few  crrours  of  the  press  corrected} 
**  The  original  manuscript  of  my  father*8  ObttrvatUmt 
an  the  MtJihekanetw  Langtiof^e  is  not  found  among  his 

papera. The  original  impression  was  taken  under 

my  father's  immediate  inspection,  and  is  therefore  pro- 
bably pretty  free  firom  erroura  of  the  press.  A  co|^,  now 
in  posaesston  of  Dr.  Chapm,  is  corrected  in  my  /ather*s 
handwriting;  in  this,  only  three  typographical  errours  are 
noticed.    They  are  the  following : 

1.  **0n  the  11th  page,  line  15  from  top,  the  yrordpeh- 
ttmqmttoo  is  corrected  to  read  pehtuhguisioo  (the 
n  should  be  h,) 

S.  **  On  the  16th  page,  fine  3  from  top,  the  two  last  syl- 
lables in  the  last  Indian  word  should  be  wukon 
(the  original  letter  is  erased  and  the  letter  u  in- 
serted.) 

3.  **On  the  17th  page,  line  19th  from  top,  instead  6f 
'  the  third  person,'  read  *a  third  person*. 

••  The  essay  was  never  revised  or  corrected  by  the 
author,  as  I  have  reason  to  believe,  with  any  view  to  iis 
improvement  or  future  publication.  A  few  facts,  tendmg 
to  show  my  &ther*s  acquaintance  with  the  Indian  language 
and  his  means  and  advantages  of  acquiring  it,  are  stated 
in  a  preface  to  the  Obtefvations.  To^these  I  do  not 
know  that  I  coold  add  any  thing.' 

The  editor  has  only  to  add,  tba":  he  has  thought  it 
might  be  useful,  in  the  present  state  of  theoe  studies 
among  us,  to  add  a  few  Notes  to  Dr.  Edwurds*  work, 
with  a  view  to  confirm  some  parts  of  it  bv  observations 
made  since  his  time,  and  in  diflferent  parts  of  the  coirti- 
ncot ;  and  with  the  farther  view  of  showi  ,ig  the  great  ex- 
tent of  the  Delaware  language  (several  dialects  of  which 
are  enumerated  in'  the  first  page  of  the  work)  the  editor 
has  subjoined  a  Comparative  Vocahdaryy  containing 
specimens  of  s<Mne  of  tliose  dialects.  In  comparing  the 
words  there  given,  it  may  not  be  unnecessary  for  the 


0  THE  INDIAN  LANOVAOE8. 

mder  to  be  apprised,  that,  as  they  are  taken  from  writers 
and  other  persons  of  difierent  European  nations,  it  will  be 
necessary  to  give  the  letters  the  same  powers  which  they 
have  in  the  languages  of  those  different  nations.  Thie 
very  same  dialcet,  as  written  by  a  German,  a  Frenchman 
and  an  Englishman,  often  appears  like  so  many  different 
languages  t  and  in  making  an  extensive  comparison  of 
the  Indian  dialects,  the  want  of  a  common  orthoftraphy  ia 
severely  felt  by  the  student.  It  is  to  be  hoped,  however, 
that,  with  the  co-operation  of  European  scholars,  we 
shall  be  able  to  remedy  this  inconvenience. 

JOHN  PICKERING. 

Balea,  MuMohnietto,) 
Maj  1ft,  18tt.       { 


OBSERVATIONS  ON  THE  LANGUAGE  OF  THE  MUHHEKANEEW 

INDIANS  I 

In  tp/kicA  tht  Bxient  of  thid  Langw^e  in  M)rth  JSmeriea  it  Aewn  | 
it$  Oenius  i$  grammatieaUif  traced  t  some  of  its  PeculiarUie$t 
and  ume  lnttanee$  of  Analogy  between  that  and  the  Hebrew  are 
pointed  out. 

Communicated,  to  the  Connecticut  Society  of  Art*  and  Scieneettond 
publiehed  at  the  Bequett  of  the  Soeiay, 

By  Jonathan  Edwakdi,  D.  O.  Pattor  of  a  Church  in  JWir  Haven, 
and  Member  of  the  Connecticut  8oeiettf  of  Arte  and  BeienceM* 

I^KW  Havjut,  PriDte4  by  Jotiah  Mci^,  M|Doo,lxxxviii. 


3  Prefaei, 

jL  hat  the  following  observations  ma^  obtain  credit* 
it  may  be  proper  to  inform  the  reader,  with  what  advan- 
tages they  have  been  made. 

When  I  was  but  six  years  of  age,  my  father  removed 
with  his  family  to  Stoekori^e^  wiuch,  at  that  time,  was 
inhabited  by  Indians  almost  solely ;  as  there  were  in  the 
town  but  twelve  &miUes  of  whites  or  Anglo-Americans, 


iJsS^ffl^ 


'+1 


THE  llfDiAlf  LAHOOAOCS. 


and  perhapt  one  hundred  and  fifty  famiiiea  of  Indians. 
The  Indians  being  the  nearest  neighbours,  I  constuntiv  • 
associated  with  them  t  their  boys  were  my  daily  school- 
mates and  play-fellows.  Out  of  my  father's  houue,  I 
seldom  heard  any  language  spoken,  beside  the  Indian. 
By  these  means  I  acquired  the  knowkrd^  of  that  lan- 
guage, and  a  great  facility  in  speaking  it.  It  became 
more  fiimiliar  to  me  than  mj^  mother  tensue.  I  knew 
the  names  of  some  things  in  Indian,  which  I  did  not 
know  in  English ;  even  all  my  thoughta  ran  in  Indian : 
and  though  the  true  pronunciation  of  the  language  in  ex- 
tremely difficult  to  all  but  themselves,  they  acknowledg- 
ed, that  I  had  acquired  it  perfectly ;  which,  as  they  said, 
never  had  been  acquired  before  by  any  Anglo-American. 
On  account  of  this  acquisition,  as  well  as  on  account  of 
my  skill  in  their  language  in  general,  I  received  from 
them  many  compliments  applauding  my  superiour  wis- 
dom. This  skill  in  their  language  I  have  in  a  good 
measure  retained  to  this  day. 

After  I  had  drawn  up  these  observations,  lest  there 
should  be  some  mistakes  in  them,  I  carried  them  to 
Stockbridge,  and  read  them  to  Capt.  Yeghum,  a  principal 
Indian  of  the  tribe,  who  is  well  versed  in  his  own  lan- 
guage, and  tolerably  informed  concerning  the  English : 
and  I  availed  myself  of  his  remarks  and  corrections. 

From  these  facts,  the  reader  will  form  his  own  opinion 
of  the  truth  and  accuracy  of  what  is  now  offered  him. 

When  I  was  in  my  tenth  year,  my  father  sent  me  among 
the  six  nations,  with  a  design  that  I  should  learn  ^ 
their  language,  and  thus  become  qualified  to  be  a 
missionary  among  them.  But  on  account  of  the  war 
with  France,  which  then  existed,  I  continued  among 
them  but  about  six  months.  Therefiare  the  knowledge 
which  I  acquired  of  that  lan^age  was  but  imperfect ; 
and  at  this  time  I  retain  ao  little  of  it,  that  1  will  not 
hazard  any  particular  critical  remarks  on  it.  I  may  ob- 
serve, however,  that  though  the  words  of  the  two  lan- 
guages are  totally  different,  yet  their  structure  is  in  some 
respects  analogous,  particularly  in  the  use  of  prefixes 
and  suffixes* 


TH£  INDIAN  LANOUAOU. 


Obi$rwUum$t  tf€» 


The  langoaKC  which  is  now  the  sobicct  of  obienra. 
Uon,  ill  that  (^  the  Muhhekoneew  or  atockbridge  In- 
dians. They,  aa  wrll  aa  the  tribe  at  New  London,  are 
by  the  Anglo- Americana,  called  Mohegmuy  which  ia  a 
corruption  oi  Muhhektmeew^*  in  .  '  aingulur,  or  JMiiA- 
hekaneokt  in  the  plural.  I'hia  langu^^e  is  apoken  by  all 
Uie  Indiana  throughout  New  England.  Every  tribe,  aa 
that  of  Stockbridge,  that  of  Farmington,  that  of.  New 
London,  8cc.  haa  a  different  dialect  i  but  the  languase  is 
radically  the  same.  Mr.  Elliot^a  transition  of  the  Bible 
is  in  a  particular  dialect  of  this  language.  The  dialect 
followed  in  these  observations,  is  that  of  Stockbridge. 
This  language  appears  to  be  much  more  extenaivc  tlum 
any  other  language  in  North  America.  The  languagea 
of  the  Delawares  in  Pennsylvania,  of  the  Penobscots 
bordering  on  Nova  Scotia,  of  the  Indiana  of  St.  Francia 
in  Canada,  of  the  Shawanese  on  the  Ohio,  and  of  the 
Cbippewaus  at  the  westward  of  Lake  Huron,  are  all  rad- 
ically the  same  with  the  Mohegan.  The  same  ia  said 
concerning  the  languagea  of  the  Ottowaua,  Nanticooks, 
Munbees,  Menonionees,  Messisaugaa,  Saukies,  Oita- 
gaumies,  Killistinoes,  Nipegons,  Algonkins,  Winneba* 
ffoes,  Sccf  That  the  languages  of  the  several  tribes  in 
New  England,  of  the  Delawares,  and  of  Mr.  Elliot's 
Bible,  are  radically  the  same  with  the  Mohegan,  I  assert 
g  from  my  own  knowledge.  What  I  assert  concern- 
ing the  language  of  the  Penobscots,  I  have  fcom  a 
gentleman  in  Massachusetts,  who  has  been  much  con- 
versant among  the  Indians.  That  the  language  of  the 
Shawanese  andChippewaus  is  radically  the  aame  with  the 
Mohegan,  I  ahall  endeavour  lo  shew.  My  authcMrities 
for  what  I  say  of  the  languages  of  the  other  nations  are 
Capt.  Yogkumt  before-mentioned,  and  Carver'a  TVamit. 

*  WhereTer  w  oooun  in  an  Indian  word,  it  h  a  awe  conionant,  m  in 
iMrifc,  worM,  tic. 

t  [See  a  Compantire  Voeabolanr  of  tettnA  of  th«e  Ifenfucgei,  at  Qfe 
end  of  the  J^otet  to  the  present  emtion.    Eon.} 


I' 


^  ^.-J  ^, 


THE  INDIAll  LAMOUAOl 


M  in 

Qfe 


To  Uhittrate  the  analogy  between  the  Mohtgan^  the 
Showarucs  and  the  Chipfktwuu  ianguagea,  1  ahail  exhibit 
a  ahott  liat  of  worda  ol'  thoae  three  Uinguagea.  For  the 
likt  of  Mokegtm  worda,  I  myaelf  am  accountable.  That 
of  the  Skamame  worda  waa  communicated  to  me  by 
General  Farsmtt  whohaa  had  opportunitv  to  make  a 
partial  vocabulary  of  that  language.  For  tne  worda  of 
the  CMppewau  language  I  am  dependent  on  Canftr^t 
Thweli, 


EngHih, 

A  bear 

A  beayer 

Eye 

Ear 

Fetch 

My  Grandfather 

My  Grandmother 

My  Grandchild 

He  jjoes 

A  girl 

House 

He  (that  man) 

His  head 

His  heart 

Hair 

Her  husband 

His  teeth 

I  thank  you 

My  uncle 

I 

Thou 

Wo 

Ya 

Water 

Eldev  aiMer 

River 


•yUablu. 

i  gK'muar  ladiia  woid  hM  th*  sltoong  gattonl  aooadl,  whM  k  ghrw-bw 
the  Scots  to  the  same  letters  in  the  iraNi  totif  &y  mmgkf  mt. 

%  [Qm.    Weeknvahm  i  Edit.] 


Mtlutmu 

Skawtnw, 

Mquoh 

Mauquah 

Amisque* 

Amaquah 

Hkeesque 

Skeesacoo 

Towohque 

Towacah 

Pautoh 

Peatoloo 

Nemoghhomet 

Nemaf^ompethau 

Nohhum 

Nocuuithau 

Nau|;hees 

Noosthethau 

Pumusoo 

Pomthalo 

Feesquausoo 

Sauauthauthau 
Weecuah 

Weekumuhmt 

Uwoh 

Welah 

Weensis 

Weeseh  (I  im- 

agine  nuspelt,  for  weenseh.) 

Utoh 

Otaheh 

Weghaukun 

Welathoh 

Waughecheh 

Wasecheh 

Wepeeton 

Wepeetalee 

Wneeweh 

Neauweh 

Nsees    . 

Neeseethaa 

Neah 

Nelah 

Keah 

Kelah 

Neaunnh 

Nelauareh 

Keaowuh 

Kelauweh 

Nbey 

Nippee 

ffoieca 

Nemeethau 

Sepoo 

Thepee 

.*:   "• 


10 


TBI  INDIAN  LANOUAOI8. 


The  following  is  a  specimen  of  analogy  between  the 
Mohegan  and  Chippewau  kmguages. 


"J'lTt^'. 


Engtuk, 

A  bear 
A  beaver 
To  die  (I  die) 
/  Dead  (he  is  dead) 

Devil 

Dress  the  kettle  ) 
(make  a  fire)    5 

His  eyes 

Fire 

Give  it  him 

A  spirit  (a  spectre) 
How 
8       House 

An  impostor  (he 
is  an  impostor  or  bad 
man) 

Go 

Marry 

Good  for  nought 

River 

Shoe 

The  sun 

Sit  down 

Water 

Where 

Winter 

Wood 


Mokiguu 

Mquoh 

Amisque 

Nip 

Nboo,  or  nepoo* 
K  Mtandou,  or  M  an> ) 
(     nitot  J 

Pootoowah 

Ukeesquan 

Stauw 

Meenuh 

Mannito 

Tuneht 

Weekumuhmll 


I 


Mtissoo 

Pumisseh 

Weeween 

Mtit 

Scpoo 

Mkissin 

Keesogh 

Mattipeh 

Nbey 

Tehah 

Hpoon 

Metooque 


Mackwah 
Amik 
Nip 
Neepoo 

Manitou 

Poutwah     ' 

Wiskinkhie 

Scutta 

Millaw 

Manitou 

Tawnd 

Wigwaum 

Mawlawtissie 

Pimmoussie 

Weewin 

Malatat 

Sippim 

Maukissin 

Kissis 

Mintipin 

Nebbi 

Tah 

Pepoun 

Mittic 


( 


11 

u 
n 
d 
vi 
ft 
d 
U 
a 


Almost  every  man,  who  writes  Indian  words,  spells 
them  in  a  peculiar  manner :  and  I  dare  say,  if  the  same 
person  had  taken  down  all  the  words  above,  from  the 
mouths  of  the  Indians,  he  would  have  spelt  them  more 

*  The  fint  syllable  icaroely  soanded. 
■   t  The  lait  of  then  wordi  properly  ngnifies  a  tpeotre,  or  any  thin;  firigbtfid. 

I  Wherever  u  occnn,  it  hai  not  the  long  aoand  of  the  English  «  as  in  com> 
•MNU ;.  but  the  sound  of  «  in  tmeU^  though  much  protracted.  The  other 
Towels  are  to  be  pronounced  as  in  English. 

I  [<Qft,  Weekutrahm?    Edit.] 


I 


en  the 


•vf"    1 


■..'»  !- 


V.  I?* 


pells 

lame 

the 

more 


I  com* 
other 


TRB  IKMAII  LAliaOAOW. 


li 


alike,  md  the  coincidence  would  have  appeared  more 
striking.  Most  of  those,  who  write  and  print  Indiaa 
words,  use  the  letter  a  where  Uie  sound  is  tnat  <^  «A  or 
(ttt.  Hence  the  n»dcr  will  observe,  that  in  seme  of  tlw 
Mohegan  words  above,  o  or  M  is  used,  when  a  or  oA  it 
used  in  the  correspondent  words  of  the  other  languages  ; 
as  Aipioht  Mauquah.  1  dpubt  not  the  sound  of  those 
two  syllaUea  is  exactly  the  same,  as  pronounced  1^  the 
Indians  (^  the  diferent  tribes.     *  , 

It  is  not  to  be  supposed,  that  the  like  cmnoidence  it 
extended  to  ail  the  words  of  those  languages.  Very  ma- 
ny words  are  totally  diflfiercnt.  Still  the  analogy  is  such 
as  is  sufficient  to  show,  that  they  are  mere  dialects  of  the 
same  original  language. 

I  could  not,  throughout,  give  words  of  the  same 
cation  in  the  three  languages,  as  the  two  vocaf 
laries  from  which  I  extracted  the  Shawanee 
Chippewau  words,  did  not  contain  wcMrds  of  the 
nification,  excepting  in  some  instances. 

The  Mohauk,  which  is  the  language  of  the  Six 
IS  entirely  different  from  thai  m  die  Mohegans. 
is  no  more  appearance  of  a  derivation  of  one  of  these 
mentioned  iMiguages  from  the  other,  than  there  is  of  e 
derivation  of  either  of  them  fix>m  the  English.  One  Ob* 
vious  diversity,  and  in  which  the  Mohauk  is  perlups  dtf« 
ferent  from  every  other  language,  is,  that  it  is  whoHr 
destitute  of  labials ;  whereas  the  Mohegan  abounds  with 
labials.  .  I  shaU  here  give  the  numer^  as  fiur  as  ten, 
and  the  Fattr  A^f«r,  in  both  languages. 


Mohegan* 

.  vQ^VvWll^s 

l^ittoh 

Uskot 

Keesoh 

Teggeaeh 

Moghhoh 

ObT 

Kauwoh 

Kialeh 

Nimon 

Wisk 

ligwittua 

Yoi/ok 

Tupouwua 

Chautok 

Ghusooh 

Sottago 

Nauneeweh 

Teuhtoh 

Altaooit 

3 

Wialeh 

THE  INDIAN  LANOUAOE8, 


^ 


The  Pater  Noster,  in  the  Mohegan  language,  is  as 
follows : 

Noghnuh,  ne  spummuck  oieon,  taugh  mauwch  wneh 
Mrtukoseauk  neanne  annuwoieon.  Taugh  ne  aunchuwu- 
tainmun  wawehtuseek  maweh  noh  pummeh.  Ne 
annoihitteech  mauweh  awauneek  noh  hkey  oiecheek, 
ne  aunchuwutammun,  ne  aunoihitteet  neek  spummuk 
oieclieek.  Menenaunuh  noonooh  wuhkamauk  tquogh 
nuh  uhhuyutamauk  ngummauweh.  OhquutamouiwC'^ 
naunuh  auneh  mumachoieaukeh,  ne  anneh  ohquutamou- 
woieauk  numpeh  neek  mumacheh  annehoquaukeek. 
Cheen  hquukquaucheh  siukeh  annchenaunuh.  Pannee- 
weh  htouwenaunuh  neen  maumtehkth.  Keah  ngwehcheh 
.Q  kwiouwauweh  mauweh  noh  pummeh;  ktanwoi; 
estah  awaun  wtinnoiyuwun  ne  aunoieyon  ;  hanwee- 
vi^eh  ne  ktiunoieen.    Amen. 

"  The  Pater  Noster,  in  the  language  of  the  Six  Nations, 
taken  from  Smith's  History  of  New  York,  is  this :        . 

Soungwauneha  caurounkyawga  tehseetaroan  sauhson* 
eyousta  esa  sawaneyou  okettauhsela  ehneauwoung  na 
caurounkyawga  nughwonshauga  neatewehnesalauga 
taugwaunautoronoantoughsick  toantaugweleewheyou- 
staung  cheneeyeut  chaquataulehwheyoustaunna  tough- 
sou  taugwaussareneh  tawautottenaugalou^htoung^ 
nasawne  sacheautaugwass  coantehsalohaunzaickaw  esa 
sawauneyou  esa  sashoutzta  esa  soungwasoung  chenneau- 
baungwa ;  auwen.* 

The  reader  will  observe,  that  there  is  not  a  single  labial 
either  in  the  numerals  or  Pater  Noster  of  this  language ; 
and  that  when  they  come  to  amen^  from  an  aversion  to 
shutting  the  lips,  they,  change  the  m  to  w.f 

In  no  part  of  these  languages  does  there  appear  to  be 
a  greater  coincidence,  than  in  this  specimen.  I  have 
never  noticed  one  word  in  either  of  them,  which  has  any 
analogy  to  the  correspondent  word  in  the  other  language^ 

Concerning  the  Mohegan  language,  it  is  observable, 
that  there  is  no  diversity  of  gender,  either  in  nouns  or 
pronouns.    The  very  same  words  express  he  and  «Ae, 


*  [See  Note  I.    Edit.] 


t  [See  Note  t.    Eon.] 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAOE8. 


13 


rim  and  her,^  Hence,  when  the  Mohegans  speak  Eng. 
lish,  they  generally  in  this  respect  follow  strictly  their 
own  idiom:  A  man  will  say  concerning  his  wi£e,  he 
tickt  he  gone  awatft  &c. 

With  regard  to  casein  they  have  but  one  variation 
from  the  nominative,  which  is  formed  by  the  addition  of 
the  syllable  am  as  wnechun^  his  child,  vmechunan.  This 
varied  case  seems  to  suit  indifferently  any  case,  except 
the  nominative.f 

The  plural  is  formed  by  adding  a  letter  or  syllable  to 
the  singular  ;  as  nenuumauw,  a  man,  nemannauk,  men : 
penumpausoot  a  boy,  penumpautooukt  boys.| 

1  he  Mohegans  more  carefully  distinguish  the  natu-  1 1 
nd  relations  of  men  to  each  other,  than  we  do,  or  per- 
haps any  other  nation.  They  have  one  word  to  express 
an  elder  brother,  netohcon  ;  another  to  express  a  younger 
brother,  ngheetum.  One  to  express  an  elder  sister, 
nnuue:  another  to  express  a  younger  sister,  r^heeaum. 
But  the  word  for  younger  brother  and  younger  sister  is 
the  same,—- AVwff  is  my  uncle  by  my  mother's  sidet 
nuchehque  is  my  uncle  by  the  father's  side. 

The  Mohegans  have  no  adjectives  in  all  their  Ian* 
guage  ;  unless  we  reckon  numerals  and  such  words  as 
aUi  manyt  8cc.  adjectives.  |t  Of  adjectives  which  express 
the  qualities  of  substances,  I  do  not  find  that  they  have 
any.  They  express  those  qualities  by  verbs  neuter ;  as 
•wnissoo,  he  is  beautiful ;  mtissoo,  h6  is  homely ;  pehtuh' 
^uUsoOt  he  is  tall ;  mconmoOf  he  is  malicious,  S^c.  Thus 
m  Latin  many  qualities  are  expressed  by  verbs  neuter,  as 
valeo,  caleo,  frigeo,  &c.—- Although  it  may  at  first  seem 
not  only  singular  and  curious,  but  impossible,  that  a 
language  should  exist  without  adjectives ;  yet  it  is  an 
indubitable  &ct*  Nor  do  they  seem  to  suffer  any  incon. 
venience  by  it.  They  as  readily  express  any  quality  by 
a  neuter  verb,  as  we  do  by  an  adjective. 

If  it  should  be  inquired,  how  it  appears  that  the  words 
above  mentioned  are  not  adjectives ;  I  answer  it  appears, 


*  [See  Note  3,    Edit.] 
t  (,S«e  Npte  4,    Edit.] 


X  [See  Note  5.    Edit.] 
n  {See  Note  7.    Edit.] 


li 


fit  tWDlAff  LAMOVAOfiB. 


m  they  have  a*!  the  same  variations  and  dectensions  of 
other  verbs.  To  walk  will  be  acknowledged  to  be  a 
verb.  This  verb  is  declined  thus ;  npumseh,  I  walk  i 
kpumseh,  thou  walkest ;  pumissoo,  he  walketh ;  npun»> 
lehnuh,  we  walk ;  kpumsehmuh,  ye  walk ;  pumissoouk, 
they  walk*  In  the  same  manner  are  the  words  in  ques- 
tion declined ;  npehtuhquisseh,  I  am  tall ;  kpehtuhquisaeh, 
thou  art  tall ;  pehtuhquissoo,  he  is  tall ;  npehtuhquissch- 
nuh,  we  are  tall;  kpehtuhquissehmuh,  ye 'are  tall^ 
pehtuhquissoouk,  they  are  tall. 

Though  the  Mohegans  have  no  proper  adjectivea, 
.  o  they  have  participles  to  all  their  verbs :  as  pehtuh- 
quisseet,  the  man  who  is  tall :  paumseet,  the  man 
who  walks ;  waunseet,  the  man  who  is  beautiful ;  oieet^ 
the  man  who  lives  or  dwells  in  a  place ;  oioteet,  the  man 
who  fights.  So  in  the  plural,  pehtuhquis!!ieecheek,  the 
tall  men ;  paumseecheek,  they  who  walk,  &c. 

It  is  observable  of  the  participles  of  this  language,  that 
they  are  declined  through  the  persons  and  numbers,  in 
the  same  manner  as  verbs :  thus,  paumae-nli,  1  walkingi 
paumse-an,  thou  walking ;  paumseet^  he  walking;  paum. 
aeauk,  we  walking ;  paumseauque,  ye  walking ;  paumse- 
cheek,  they  walking. 

They  nave  no  relative  corresponding  to  our  who  or 
wfnefu  Instead  of  ihe  man  who  waUttt  they  say,  the 
walking  man,  or  the  walker.* 

As  they  have  no  adjectives,  of  course  they  have  no 
comparison  of  adjectives  ;t  yet  they  are  put  to  no  diffi* 
culty  to  express  the  .comparative  excellence  or  baseness 
of  any  two  things.  With  a  neuter  verb  expressive  of  the 
quality,  thev  use  an  adverb  to  point  out  the  degree :  as 
annuweeweh  wnissoo,  he  is  more  beautiful;  kahnuh 
wnissoo,  he  h  very  beautiful.  Nemannauwoo,  he  is  a 
man :  annuweeweh  nemannauwoo,  he  is  a  man  of  supe> 
riour  excellence  or  courage ;  kahnuh  nemannauwoof  he 
b  a  man  of  extraordinary  excellence  or  courage. 

Beside  th  pronouns  common  in  odier  languages,  they 
express  the  pronouns,  both  substantive  and  adjective,  by 


*  '[Bm  Hot*  •.   Ean.] 


t  [8w  N«to  y.    Eon.] 


THE  nmAir  languages. 


taU; 


ifjg^stett  or  by  letters  or  syllables  addt^  at  the  beginninn, 
or  ends,  or  both,  uf  their  nouns.  In  this  particular  true 
structure  of  the  language  coincides  with  that  of  the  He- 
brew, in  an  instance  in  which  the  Hebrew  di&n  from 
•11  the  languages  of  Europe^  ancient  or  modem.  How*. 
ever,  the  use  of  the  affixed  pronouns  in  the  Mohegan 
language  is  not  perfectly  umilar  to  the  use  of  them  in 
the  Hebrew  :  as  in  the  Hebrew  they  are  joined  to  the 
ends  of  words  only,  but  in  the  Mohegan,  they  are  some- 
times joined  to  the  ends,  sometimes  to  the  beginnings, 
and  sometimes  to  both.  Thus,  tmohheean  is  a  hatchet 
or  axe ;  wdumheeam  b  my  hatchet ;  ktumheamt  thy  .  ^ 
liatchet;  vtumhecarit  his  hatchet;  ndmuheeannuk, 
our  hatchet ;  ktumfveanoowuht  your  hatchet ;  utumhe- 
eannoawuht  their  hatchet.  It  is  observable,  that  the 
pronouns  for  the  singular  number  are  prefixed,  and  for 
the  plural,  the  prefixed  pronouns  for  the  ni^lar  beuig 
letainec^  there  are  others  added  as  suffixes. 

It  is  farther  to  be  observed,  that  by  the  increase  of  the 
word,  the  vowels  are  changed  and  transposed  ;  as 
tmohecan,  ndumhecan ;  the  o  is  changed  mto  u  and 
transposed,  in  a  maimer  analcgous  to  what  is  often  done 
in  the  Hebrew.   The  /  is  changed  into  </,  euphtmue  gratia, 

A  considerable  part  of  the  appellatives  are  never  used 
without  a  pronoun  affixed.  The  Mohegans  can  say,  my 
&ther,  neign,  thy  fadier,  h^h^  &c.  &c.  but  they  cannot 
say  absolutely  father*  There  is  no  such  word  in  all 
their  hmguage.  If  you  were  to  s»jr  c^A,  which  the  word 
would  be,  if  stripped  of  all  affixes,  you  would  make  a 
M<^^n  both  stare  and  smile.  The  same  observation 
is  a|^)hci^le  to  mother^  brother^  titter^  son,  heady  hand, 
foot,  Qcc ;  in  short  to  those  things  in  general  which  ne- 
cessarily in  their  natural  state  belong  to  some  person.  A 
liatchet  is  sometimes  found  without  an  owner,  and  there- 
fore they  sometimes  have  occasion  to  speak  of  it  abso- 
lutely, or  without  referiing  it  to  an  owner.  But  as  a 
head,  hand,  fitc.  naturally  belong  to  some  person^  and 
they  have  no  occasion  to  speak  mA  them  without  referring 
to  the  person  to  whom  they  belong ;  so  they  have  no 
words  to  express  them  absolutely.     This  I  presume  is  a 


16 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAOES. 


peculiarity  in  which  this  language  diflfera  from  ail  Ian- 
guageit,  which  have  ever  yet  come  to  the  knowledge  of 
uie  learned  world.* 

The  pronouns  are  in  like  manner  prefixed  and  suffix- 
ed to  verbs.  The  Mohegans  never  use  a  verb  in  the 
infinitive  mood,  or  without  a  nominative  or  agent ;  and 
never  use  a  verb  transitive  without  expressing  both  the 
agent  and  the  object,  correspondent  to  the  nominative 
I J  and  accusative  cases  in  Latin.  Thus  they  can 
neither  say,  to  love,  nor  /  h/vcj  thou  gweit,  &c. 
But  they  can  say,  /  love  thee,  thou  givest  him,  &c.  viz. 
Nduhwhunuw,  1  love  him  or  her ;  nduhwhuntammin,  I 
love  it ;  ktuhwhunin,  I  love  thee ;  ktukwhunoohmuh^  I 
love  you,  (iii  the  plural)  nduhwhununkt  I  love  them. 
This,  I  think,  is  another  peculiarity  of  this  language. 

Another  peculiarity  is,  that  the  nominative  and  accusa- 
tive  pronouns  prefixed  and  suffixed,  are  always  used» 
even  though  other  nominatives  and  accusatives  be  ex- 
pressed* Thus  they  cannot  say,  John,  loves  Peter; 
they  always  say,  Jom  he  loves  hm  Peter;  John  uduh* 
whunuw  Peteran,  Hence,  when  the  Indians  begin  to  talk 
English,  they  universally  express  themselves  according 
to  this  idiom. 

It  is  further  observable,  that  the  pronoun  in  the  accu- 
sative case  is  sometimes  in  the  same  instance  expressed 
by  both  a  prefix  and  a  suffix ;  as  kthuwhumn,  I  love 
thee.  The  k  prefixed,  and  the  syllable  tn,  suffixed,  both 
unite  to  express,  and  are  both  necessary  to  express  the 
accusative  case  thee* 

They  have  no  verb  substantive  in  all  the  language.f 
Therefore  they  cannot  say,  he  is  a  mon,  he  is  a  coufard, 
&c.  They  express  the  same  by  one  word,  which  is  a 
verb  neuter,  viz.  nemannauwoo,  he  is  a  man.  Neman- 
nauw  is  the  noun  substantive,  man  .*  that  turned  into  a 
verb  neuter  of  the  third  person  singular,  becomes  ne- 
mannauwoo,  as  in  Latin  it  is  said,  grsecor,  graecatur,  &c. 
Thus  they  turn  any  substantive  whatever  into  a  verb 
lieuter  :|  as  kmattannissauteuh,  you  are  a  coiwKd^iirom 

*  [See  Note  8.    Edit.]  t  [See  Note  0.    Edit.] 

X  [See  Note  10.    Edit.] 


THE  INDIAN   LANOUAOEfl. 


17 


matamauteet  a  coward :   kpeetquautooeh^  you  are  a  g^rl, 
from  peetqauioOi  a  girl.* 

Hence  also  we  see  the  reason^  wh^  they  have  no  verb 
substantive.  As  they  have  no  adjectives,  and  as  they 
turn  their  substantives  into  verbs  on  any  occasion ;  they 
have  no  use  for  the  substantive  or  auxiliary  verb. 

The  third  person  singular  seems  to  be  the  radix,  15 
or  most  simple  form  of  the  several  persons  of  their 
verbs  in  the  indicative  mood :  but  the  second  person  sin- 
gular of  the  imperative  seems  to  be  the  most  simple  of 
any  of  the  forms  of  their  verbs ;  as  meetseht  eat  thou : 
meettoOt  he  eateth:  nmecttehf  I  eat:  kmeetseh,  thou 
eatest,  8cc. 

They  have  a  past  and  future  tense  to  their  verbs ;  but 
often,  if  not  generally,  they  use  the  form  of  the  present 
tense,  to  express  both  past  and  future  events :  as  vmuk' 
vewoh  ndiotuwohpoh,  yesterday  I  fought;  or wnukuwoh 
ndiotuwoht  yesterday  I  fight:  ruKoiuwauch  wupkoh^  I 
shall  fight  to-morrow ;  or  vtupkauch  ruHotmvoh,  to-morrow 
I  fight.  In  this  last  case  the  variation  oivfupkoh  to  wup* 
kauch  denotes  the  future  tense ;  and  this  variation  is  in 
die  word  ttHnorrcfWt  not  in  the  verb  Jighi.'\ 
,  They  have  very  few  prepositions,  and  those  are  rarely 
used,  but  in  composition.  Anneh  is  to,  ocheh  is  from. 
But  to,  from,  &c.  are. almost  always  expressed  by  an  alter- 
ation of  the  verb.  Thus,  ndog^eh  is  I  ride,  and  fFhogh' 
quetookoke  is  Stockbridge.  But  if  I  would  say  in  in. 
dian,  /  ride  to  Stoekbndee^  I  must  say,  not  anneh 
Whf^hquetookoke  ndoghpM^  but  fFnoghquetookoke  ndin- 
netoghpeh.  If  I  would  say,  /  ride  from  Stockbridge,  it 
must  be,  not  oeheh  fFnoghquetookoke  ndoghpeh,  but 
^noghquetookoke  nochetognpeh.  Thus  nt^noghoh  is,  I 
walk  to  a  place  :  notognogh,  I  walk  from  a  place :  m/m- 
nehnuht  I  run  to  a  place :  nochehnuh^  I  run  from  a  place. 
And  any  verb  may  be  compounded,  with  the  preposi- 
tions anneh  and  ocheh,  to  and  from. 

*  The  oireomstance  that  they  have  no  verb  substantiTe,  accounts  for  their 
not  uaing  that  verb,  when  they  speak  English.    They  say,  /  m«n,  /  titk,  Sm. 
t  tS«e  Note  11.    Edit.] 


18 


TUB  INDIAN  LANOVAOH. 


It  has  been  said,  that  savages  have  no  parts  i>f  speech 
beside  the  subbtaiitive  and  the  verb,  litb  is  not  true 
concemhiff  the  Moheeans,  nor  conccrnhig  any  other 
tribe  of  Indians,  of  whose  language  Thave  any  knoir. 
ledge.  The  Mohegans  have  all  the  eight  parts  of  speech, 
to  be  found  in  other  hmguages ;  though  prepositions  are 
ao  rarely  used,  except  in  composition,  that  1  once  deter, 
mined  that  part  of  s^ch  to  be  wanting.  It  has  been 
.g  said,  also,  that  savages  never  abstract,  and  have  no 
abstract  terms,  which,  with  regard  to  the  Mdiegans, 
is  another  mistake.  They  have  ukwhundomukwt,  love ; 
tekeenumhwukon,  hatred ;  naemtmwvukony  malice ;  peyuk^ 
tommauruukottt  religion,  8cc.  1  doubt  not  but  that  there 
is  in  this  language  the  full  proportion  of  abstract  to  con- 
crete terms,  which  is  commonly  to  be  found  in  other 
languages.* 

Besides  what  has  been  observed  concerning  prefixes 
and  suffisces,  there  is  a  remarkable  analogy  between 
some  words  in  the  Mohegan  language  and  the  correa- 

rondent  words  m  the  Hebrew.-— —In  Mohegan  JVSmA  is 
;  the  Hebrew  of  which  is  jtni*  Keah  is  thou  or  thee : 
the  Hebrews  use  ka  the  suffix.  Uwoh  is  this  man,  or 
this  thing ;  very  analogous  to  the  Hebrew  hu  or  huot 
ipse.  JVeauimh  is  we :  in  the  Hebrew  noehnu  and  unachmu 
In  Hebrew  m  is  the  suffix  for  me^  or  the  first  person; 
In  the  Mohegan  »  or  n^  n  prefixed  to  denote  the  firat 
person  :  as  nmectaeh  or  nemeetseh^  I  eat.  In  Hebrcir 
kor  ka'vi  the  suffix  for  the  Second  person,  and  is  indif- 
ferently either  a  pronoun  substantive  or  a<yecttvc.  K  or 
ka  has  the  same  use  in  the  Mohegan  language:  a* 
kmeetseh  or  kameetseh,  thou  eatest }  knisk,  thy  hand. 
In  Hebrew  the  vauy  the  letter  n  and  Am  are  the  suffixes 
for  he  or  him.  In  Mohegan  the  same  is  expressed  by  u 
or  top,  and  by  «o  .*  as  nduhwhtmuw^  I  k^ve  hinn,  pwmsao»,  • 
he  walketh.  The  suffix  to  express  our  or  ug  in  Hebrew 
is  nu  ;  in  Mohegan  the  suffix  of  the  same  Mgnification  i» 
nuh  i  as  noghnuh,  our  father ;  nmeeisehntiht  we  cat,  &c.t 


•  [See  Note  12.    IhS.} 


t  [Sm  note  13.    Epn.] 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAOC8. 


19 


ipeech 
t  true 
other 
knoir. 
peech, 
ms  are 
deter, 
sbeen 

NVC  I10 

«gani, 
love; 

t  there 
;o  con* 
I  other 

refixe» 
etween 
correB* 
Veah  IS 
r  thee: 
lan,  or 
}r  hua, 
kichntt* 

TSOlU 

first 
febrcw 
indifwA 
Kor 
am 
hand* 
iftxes 
by  u 

letNV'W 

Uion  is 

,  &c.t 

b 


How  far  the  uae  of  prefixes  and  suflixes,  together  with 
these  instances  of  analogy,  and  perhaps  other  instances, 
which  may; be  traced  out  by  those  who  have  more 
leisure,  go  towards  proving,  that  the  North  American 
Indians  ai«  of  Hebrew,  or  at  least  A^tick  extraction,  is 
submitted  to  the  judgment  of  the  learned.  The  fiicU 
are  demonstrable ;  concerning  the  proper  inferences  ev- 
ery one  will  judge  for  himself.  In  the  modem  Arme- 
nian language,  the  pronouns  are  affixed.*  How  far  . « 
affixes  are  in  use  among  the  other  modem  Asiaticks, 
i  have  not  had  opportunity  to  obtain  information.  It  is 
to  be  desired,  that  those  who  are  informed,  would  com- 
municate to  the  publick  what  information  they  may  pos- 
sess, relating  to  this  matter.  Perhaps  by  such  communi- 
cation, and  by  a  comparison  of  the  languages  of  the 
North  American  Indians  with  the  languages  of  Asisy  it 
may  appear,  not  only  from  what  quarter  of  the  world,  but 
from  wnat  particular  nations,  these  Indians  are  derived. 

It  is  to  be  wished,  that  every  one  who  makes  a  vocab- 
ulary of  any  Indian  language,  would  be  careful  to  notice 
the  prefixes  and  suffixes,  and  to  distinguish  accordingly. 
One  man  may  ask  an  Indian,  what  he  calls  hand  in  his 
language,  holding  out  his  ovm  hand  to  him.  The  In- 
dian wUI  naturidly  answer  A:iM>Ar,  i.  e.  My  hand.  Another 
man  will  ask  the  same  question,  pointing  to  the  Indian*s 
hand.  In  this  case,  he  will  as  naturally  answer  nmskf 
my  hand.  Another  may  ask  the  same  question,  pointing 
to  the  hand  of  a  third  person.  In  this  case,  the  answer 
will  naturally  be  utiisk,  his  hand.  Thb  would  make  a 
ver^  considerable  diversity  in  the  corresponding  words  of 
dimrent  vocabularies  ;  when  if  due  attention  were  ren- 
dered to  the  personal  prefixes  and  suffixes,  the  words 
would  be  the  very  same,  or  much  more  similar. 

The  like  attention  to  the  moods  and  personal  affixes  of 
the  verbs  is  necessary.f  If  you  ask  an  Indian  how  he 
expresses,  in  his  language,  to  go  or  walk,  and  to  illustrate 
your  meaning,  point  to  a  person  who  is  walking ;  he 

*  Vide  Sohroderi  theiaumin  Lingiue  Armenioai 
(t  S«e  Note  14.    Edit.) 

4 


89 


vm  im>UH  LAirauAan. 


Vfill  teU  you  pmnittoa,  ke  walks.  If,  to  make  him  under- 
ataod,  you  walk  yours^lC  bia  answer  will  be  kpunueh, 
Ihou  walkcat.  If  you  illustrate  your  meaoine  by  point- 
ing to  ihe  walk  of  tlao  Indian,  the  answer  will  be  wpunueh, 
I  ^alk.  If  be  take  you  to  mean  go  or  loaA*,  in  the  im* 
penitive  mood,  he  will  unsww pumUt^h,  walk  thou. 


m^ 


ffOne^,     9Y  THC  |:OITOB. 


l)!ji  ^e  ^^trqd^ctfnJf  Ob$ervaliiau  prefixed  to  ElioVt  Grammar 
of  l^e  J^mft^l^VM^^  h^inn  Langua^t  (pqblished  in  the  pre- 
ceding vpluine  of  these  Colleptions)  it  was  stated  to  he  an  ob- 
servation of  the  early  American  writers,  that  there  was  but  one 
?fincipal  Indian  language  throughout  all  New  England,  and 
ven  ih  territories  beyond  it;  ana,  that  this  observation  was  in 
accordance  with  the  opinions  of  the  later  writers,  who  had  taken 
a  moEQ  extended  view  of  the  various  dialects  than  was  prac-? 
ti(;«bb^.  a)  tV»  firs^  setUf^eat  pf  this  c^iintry,    Ui  the  saoie 

pjjK^  |i)9  i|fA4^r  w^  iiefpFFfid  tQ  tlie  opinions  qf  the  Rev.  Dr. 
lEmm^  W  ^^  Pev«;  %t  ffc^weW^r  jf  \votV  Pf  ^^Pia*  it  was 
9Me^vM^ju:refd  int,  the  jfi^ft  as  s^t^  by  the  p)d  writers,  an4 
on\y  aiflkria  trovft  one  ap,9^ber  iti  tl^is  cfrcumstance,  that  each 
of  jthen^  con^idcr^d  the  jparticylaf  dialect,  wfth  which  he  hap- 
pened t6  be  most  femiliar,  as  the  principal  or  standard  lan- 
guage, and  the  rust  as  branches,  or  dialects,  of  it.  Dr.  Ed- 
l«aras,  therefore,  as  the  reader  will  have  already  seen  in  the 
fXMWt  W9rk%  H»9^  pf  the  Mohfgff^  m  the  principal  pr  fun^ar 
5»wl9l  ia»»»am yfkvih  "is  spqfo  by  aW  thf  Ipdiaa^  of  l^QW 
gDg!?tW  f  mfic  m.  He9l^^iy«^r,  pn  (he  ptl^er  )mit  ^nr 
mi^y'^^  ffwmrA  (<nwe  |)rpj?ei;ly  9?W  the  fjmni  lewwe) 
as  the  common  stq^k  of  tbp^  same  dialects ;  observing,  that 
',''this  is  thj^  most  widely  extended  language  of  apy  of  those, 
that  are  spoken  on  this  side  of  the  Mississippi.  It  prevails  (he 
adds)  in  the  extensive  regions  of  Canada,  from  the  coast  of 
Labrador  to  the  mputh  of  Albany^  Riveri,  which  falls  into  the 
fiirtkannpst  part  of  Hudson's  Bay,  and  from  thence  to  the 
^f^  g^.lkf-  W?^^Sh  whi?h  fqrnis  thq  giqrtl^wfs^teni  lipundaFJ 
of  the  Vnjte4  Sitat^9^^  It  appe^s^  tp  ^e  th^  langww  0(f  aH  th$ 
Indians  of  that  extensive  country,  except  those  of  the  Iroquois 
stock,  which  ^^^  \)sM  ^fee  te^tv  ftMWWQWSv^  * 


*  Transactions  of  the  Uistorica}  and  Literary  Committee,  Ac.  p.  106. 


THE  INDIAN  LillNKTAOEB.  M 

Althouch  the  high  authoritj,  on  whkh  wc  baVe  these  oitiniona, 
will  hardty  be  thooght  to  need  anj  support,  jet  the  Editor  hal 
thought  it  would  be  satisfactory  to  maity  readers,  to  see  iptei- 
mcYM  of  the  dialects  themselves ;  and  m  lias  ^icoordingly  an* 
nexed  a  short  CkmtparatiM  FoctMarM*  of  several,  whkh  are  oidj 
mentioned  by  nana  in  Dr.  Edwards*  work  as  belonging  to  the 
common  stock,  of  which  he  speaks.  Authentick  specimens  of 
these  dialects  could  not  easily  be  obtained  at  the  period  when 
Dr.  Edwards  wrote ;  and  at  the  present  tknesome  of  tkem,  per* 
haps,  are  only  to  be  found  in  the  eatensive  collection  of  Mr.  Da 
PoncMM,  to  whose  ardour  in  the  cause  of  learning  our  Country  is 
so  much  indebted  for  its  literary  character  abroad  as  Well  as 
at  home.  These  specimens,  while  they  ilfford  ample  proof 
of  the  justness  of  Dr.  Edwarda  And  Mr.  Heckewefder's 
opinions  on  this  point,  will  not  be  without  use  in  some  other 
respects.  The  Editor  has  thoueht  it  proper  to  coninc  himself 
to  the  short  list  of  English  worcn  er«en  by  Dt.  Edwards  (pp.  6 
and  7)  as  far  as  the  correspondnig  Indian  words  could  be  found 
in  those  vocabularies,  to  which  he  had  access.  The  List  might 
have  been  much  enlarged }  but,  short  as  it  ia,  it  will  be  found 
sufficient  for  the  present  purpose.  In  this  comparative  view  of 
the  several  dialects,  the  reaoer  will,  undoubtedly,  bemOchisuii- 
prised  to  discover  the  remarkaMe  fact,  that  even  the  very  distant 
tribes,  known  to  u»  bv  the  name  of  Cree  or  lfnM«Mie«tt«>  Indians 
(sometimea  called  Killistenoes)  whose  territories  lie  towapde  the 
Padfick  Ocean,  nearly  as  far  as  the  Rocky  Mountainaj  s||eaki  a 
kinm'ed  dialect  with  the  trtts^s  on  the  coasts  of  the  ArtanMt', 

In  addition  to  thb  Companttive  VoealNriary,  the  Editor  has 
thought  it  muht  be  gratifying  to  mdst  readers,  to  see  some  cottar 
parisonsof  the  grmnmatkai  aitiutuft  of  \kte  American  lan^- 
ges;  and  he  has,  therefore,  added  sonae  remariia  on  that  subjiect 
also).  But  these  remarks,  though*  not  limited  to  the  J^ortittm 
dialects  idone,  are  necessarily  confined  to'  a  very  few  particur 


NOTE  I. 


deriifed'frtm 


On  the  evidence  of  aMnity  or  diversity  of  diatectt  to  Be  deriifei 
speeimtns  of  thelndian  Numerals,  (Md  tran$taHoneofthe 
Noster. 

P.  10.    Dvr  Edwamm  here  makes  a  comparison  of  the  Pater 
M'oster  and  the  Numerals  m  Mohegan  and  Mohawk,  for  the  pur- 

*  See  the  end  of  these  Notes. 


k  -I?!.  -.^'^.^^ 


n  THl  IHDIAlf  LAIfOUAOn. 

poM  of  giving  hit  reader  some  general  idea  of  the  difference 
oetireen  those  two  tannages.  But  thcee  ipccimenii  alone  were, 
probably,  not  intended  aa  conclusive  evidenoB  ok  this  point} 
for  be  MM  on  to  state,  from  his  own  knowledge,  :hat  ^  in  no 
port  of  tnese  languages  does  there  appear  tc  Sic  a  greatio'  coin* 
cidence  than  in  tnis  specimen***  Persons  who  are  as  fismiliarlr 
acquainted  with  anyone  of  the  Indian  dialects,  as  Dr.  Edwaros 
was,  and  who  have  ofaaery«d.  the  manner  in  which  translationa  • 
are  made  into  them,  will  not  hastilv  draw  a  general  inference, 
respecting  their  similarity  or  dissimUarity,  from  such  specimens 
alone.  But  the  student,  who  is  just  entering  upon  these  inqu^ 
ries;  should  attend  to  the  following  cautions  of  Mr.  Du  Poncc.n. 
and  Mr.  Heckewelder. 

In  respect  to  the  translations  of  the  PaUr  AWfcr,  the  fr  "nrr 
of  those  writers  observes  i  **  Notwithstandinc  the  sti  '"ii?  aifinit^, 
which  exists  between  the  Massachusetts  and  tiiesf  »us  Ian* 
guages  of  the  Algonkin  or  Lenape  class,  is  too  ci.  ur  and  too 
easy  of  proof  to  m  seriously  controverted,  ^  ut  it  is  certain,  loai 
a  superncial  observer  might  with  great  plausibility  deny  it  alto- 

Kther.  Ho  would  only  nave  to  coitoparc  the  translation  of  the 
ird^a  Frttyer  into  the  Massachusetts,  as  given  by  Eliot  in  hid 
Bible,  Mat  vi.  9,  and  Luke  xi.  3,  with  that  of  Heckewelder  into 
the  Oelaware  from  Matthew,  in  the  Historical  I'ransactions, 
vol*  i.  page  489,  where  As  wmM  not  And  (we  werd$  m  thu*  two 
fm^fuagtt  Uaring  ifu  ha$t  tffinilg  (•  uteh  edW.  But  this  does  not 
orise  so  much  from  the  dmerence  of  the  idioms,  as  from  their 
richness.  ^  '\lch  afforded  to  the  tnaalators  mvltibides  of  words 
and  modes  of  expressing  the  saine  ideas,  from  which  to  make  a 
choice;  and  tliey  happenet'  not  to  hit  upon  the  same  forms  of 
expression.**  Mr.  I>n  ronceau  then  further  observes^  that  **  even 
Elmt^  own  translationa  of  tbo-Lord*B  Prayer,  as  nveo  ip  Mat- 
thew and  Luke,  diffir  more  from  each  other  than  the  variations 
of  the  text  reauire.**    Jfoiti  on  EKot'^a  Indian  Qrmmwr,  p.  vii. 

**  On  the  subject  of  the  KvmwaU  (says  Mr.  Heckewelder)  I 
have  had  occasion  to  obsarva,^  that  they  sometimes  i^tr  very 
much  in  lanraages  derived  from  the  same  stock.  Even  the 
Jlftn«i,*  a  tribe  of  the  Lenape  or  Delaware  nation,  have  not  all 
tbetr^numerals  Uke  J^ose  or  th  ■  r.<.  u'  tribe,  which' is  .he  priv* 
eq>ar  amoiv;  them.  I  shall giv?  yc<}  *  >  opport'  '  ;  of  com- 
paring;^ them  t  ^ 

•'€aH^b7Sawwte(p.6)theJfimNM.    E»n. 


ti 
11 

\1 


n 
I 


I! 


THE  nrDIAH  LAHOVAOES. 


1  0«tti 

t  Niiclu 
8  Nacha 
4  Ncwa 

ff  AWm  (Jffoiiir.  naran) 
8  Guttasch 

7  JfUekoueh(JUgoiik,vkMM- 

8  Cbaaadi  [a 

9  JVWttH 
10  IFiiiilat 


1  Nlntti 
c  Nucha 

3  Nacha 

4  Newo 

5  ft^tmmk 

6  CKitUwh 

7  Niichatcli 

10  IVUm. 


**  You  will  «aiilj  obtonre,  that  the  numbers /v«  and  fm  in  th 
Minai  dialect  resemble  more  the  Algrnkin,  s  giren  bj  Ltt 
Honian,  than  the  pure  Delaware.  I  ce  not  pre  you  the  rea- 
son of  this  difference.  To  this  jov  ivilt  add  the  numerous 
errours  committed  by  those  who  att«npt  o  write  down  the 
words  of  the  Indian  languages,  and  who  •  ither  in  their  ow.. 


have  not  alphabetical  sinis  adequate  to  the    rue  expression  of 
the  sounds,  or  want  an  Indian  tar  to  distb^v  sh  them.    I 
write  a  volume  on  the  subject  of  their  ridirulous  mista 


could 
subject  of  their  ridirulous  mistakes." 
Corrupondmet  wilk  Mr,  Du  Ponceauj  m  /fittonca/  TVoiwocHoru, 
vol.  i.  p.  381. 

As  an  example  of  the  effect  of  the  difference  n  orthography, 
/  to  which  Mr.  Heckewelder  here  alludes,  the  Edi  or  subjoins  tne 
Mohawk  numerals,  as  given  by  Edwards,  and  as  thev  are  writ- 
ten in  the  **  Primer  for  the  use  of  the  Mohawk  Children,"  pub* 
Ibhed  in  1788 ;  in  which  last,  however^  it  should  be  observed, 
that  it  is  designed  to  give  the  foragn  sounds  to  th*  vowels ; 


From  th*  Mohawk  Frimtr, 

FromBdwardi. 

1  Uskat 

1  Uskot 

S  Tekeny 

S  Tetnmwh 

S  AaMea 

S  Ohs 

4K^r^ 

4  Kialeh 

5  wik 

5  Wisk 

.  :i.'-6  Ykyak 

6Toiyok 

TTsjIdak 

8  SaMgo 

9  Tyoughtotth 

7  Chautok 

8  Softaco 
9Teuhi(9h 

10  Oy*i7 

10  Wialeh. 

Tile  Pater  JfotUr^  in  the  same  Primer,  is  also  very  different 
in  its  orthoforaphT  from  the  one  originally  publishedin  Smithes 
History  of  Mew  York,  (afterwwds  puMishM  by  Edmards^  and 


24 


THE  UVDIAN  LAKOUAGE8. 


more  recently  in  the  Mithridates)  and,  as  this  Primer  is  now  a 
rare  book  among  us,  and  this  copy  of  the  prayer  is  not  pub- 
lished in  the  Mithridates,  the  Editor  has  thought  it  might  be 
useful  to  insert  it  in  this  place : 

From  the  Mohawk  Primer.       From   Edwards   Observaiions. 


"  Songwaniha  ne  Karonghjase 
tighsideron,  Wasaghseanaaoffegn- 
tine ;  Sayanert  'sera  iewe ;  Tagh- 
serre  eghniykwan  tsinivoaght  fa- 
ronghvakouh  oni  Oghwnentsjage : 
Niyadewighneserage  tacwanada- 
ranundaghaik  nonwa ;  neoni 
tondacwari^hwiyoughston,  tsini- 
yought  oQi  Tsyakwadaderighwi> 
youghsteani;  neoni  tOgbsa  tac- 
waghsarine^t  Tewadatdenake- 
ragntdnke  neskne  sadsyadac- 
waghs  ne  Rondighsertihease. 
Amen."  * 


Soungwauneha  caurounkyawga 
tehseetaroan  sauhsoncvousta  esa 
sawaneyou  okettauhsela  ehneau- 
woung  na  caurounkyawga  nugh- 
>vonshauga  neatewehnesalauga 
taugwaunautoronoantoughsick  to- 
antaagweleewheyoustaung  che- 
neeyeut  chaquataulehwheyoa- 
stauDna  toughaou  taogwausaare- 
neb  tawautottenangaloughtouDgga 
nasawne  aacheau&ugwass  coan- 
tehsalohaunzaickaw  esa  sawaune- 
you  esa  aashoutzta  esa  soungwa- 
souDg  chenneauhauBgwa;  auwen. 


NOTE  2. 

The  LaHali. 

« 

P.  10.  Baron  La  Hontan^  in  speaking  of  the  want  oflMtUs 
in  the  Huron  language  (which  belongs  to  the  same  family  wkh 
the  Molutwk^  mentioned  by  Edwards)  relates  the  following  fact, . 
to  show  the  extreme  difficulty,  whtcn  the  Indians  of  that  stock 
experience  in  learning  the  European  languages,  on  account  of 
the  labials.  The  particular  combinations  of  sounds,  into  which 
the  Indians  naturally  fall,  when  attempting  to  speak  those  lan- 
guages, may  be  of  some  use  in  the  prosecution  of  these  inqui- 
ries: 

"  The  Hurom  and  the  Iroquois,  (says  he)  not  having  the  la- 
bials in  their  languages,  it  is  almost  impossible  for  them  to 

*  The  learned  Fatet,  whose  vigilance  in  these  researcher  m#iiitg  can  es- 
cape, refers  to  an  edition  of  this  Mohawk  Primer  of  the  year  1781,  and  the 
Common  Pr(mer^  in  the  same  language,^  of  the  year  1769.  See  Milhridaiet, 
ToK  iii.  patt  3,  p.  373,  natt.  Th«  owy  editions,  which  haV6  cdttie  nnder  the 
Sditor^s  aoCloean,  the  PitiiMMr  of  1789,  and  the  OomtH/m  Putgtrtf  V797; 
both  of  wbmh  are  in  tJifl  lifcmrjr  oT  Honwd  Uifeivenity. 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAGEB. 


2S 


s  now  a 
lot  pub- 
light  be 


rvations. 

inkyawga 
>uiita  esa 
I  ehneau- 
ga  nugh- 
lesalauga 
^haick  to- 
ag  che- 
hwheyoo- 
wausMK- 
{hiouDgga 
ass  coan- 
sawaune- 
soungwa- 
i;  aawen. 


otiabiais 
nily  wkh 
iring  fact, . 
tat  stock 
count  of 
to  which 
lose  lan- 
ge  inqui- 

tg  the  la- 
them  to 


itf  can  es- 

1,  and  the 
^Uhridate*, 
mrder  the 
r«f  ¥191 ; 


acauire  the  Frtnch  language  well.  I  have  spent  four  days  ia 
making  some  Hurons  pronounce  the  labials,  but  without  suc- 
cess ;  and  I  do  not  believe,  they  would  be  able  to  pronounce 
these  French  words,  60R,  jila^  mtnwteur,  Pontchartrain,  in  ten 
years ;  for  instead  of  saying  bon^  they  would  say  ouon ;  (or  Jilt 
they  would  say  rih ;  for  numaieur,  caoruutir,  and  for  Pontchar- 
tratni  CwchartrainJ'^ 


NOTE  3. 
Genders. 

P.  10.  "/<  is  observable  that  there  is  no  diversity  of  gender, 
either  in  nouns  or  pronouns.  The  very  same  words  express  he  and 
she,  him  and  her." 

So  Eliot  says  of  the  Massachusetts  dialect :  "  The  variation  of 
Nouns  is  not  by  male  and /«ma/e,  as  in  other,  learned  languages, 
^nd  in  European  nations  they  do ;"  but  (as  he  observes  after- 
wards) the  nouns  are  classed  under  the  two  divisions  of 
(tnimate  and  inanimate,  comprehending,  respectively,  the  names 
of  animate  and  inanimate  things ;  under  the  latter  of  which,  he 
S£^s,  are  included  the  names  of  all  Vegetables.  See  his  Gram, 
pp.  9,  10.  Eliot  does  not  expressly  state,  as  Edwards  does, 
that  the  same  word  expresses  he  and  she;  but  in  his  Grammar 
he  does  not  give  any  distinct  word  for  she,  and  in  his  Bible  he 
uses  the  same  term  for  she  (namely,  noh)  which  in  his  Grammar 
is  translated  he.  For  examples,  see  the  book  of  Ruth,  i.  3 ;  ii. 
3,  13,  &c.  In  other  places  the  word  noh  seems  to  be  equiva- 
lent to  the  demonstrative  pronoun  this  or  that  or  (what  is  the 
same  thing)  the  article  the :  "  Noh  Moabitseh  squau — it  is  the 
Moabitish  damsel,"  &c.    Ruth  U.S. 

Mr.  Heckewelder,  in  speaking  of  the  Delaware  language,  has 
the  following  remarks  upon  this  point :  '^  In  the  Indian  langua- 
ge, those  discriminating  words  or  inflexions,  which  we  call 
genders,  are  not,  as  with  us,  in  general  intended  to  distinguish 
I^jtvoeA  male  and  female  beings,  but  between  animate  and  inan- 
inutte  tbingSi  or  substances.  Trees  and  plants  (annual  plants 
and  gras^esi  excerpted)  are  included  within  the  generick  class  of 
qtwmt^  hmis^r  Hence  the  personal  pronoun  has  only  two 
9iQd?9t  ^  i  <}4P  so  express  myself  j  one  applicable  to  the  ani^ 
mate,  and  th^  Qther  to  the  inanimate  gender ;  nekama  is  the 
pertonal  lUKuiooMQal  form,  which  answers  to  he  and  she  in  Eng- 


26 


THE  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


lish.    If  you  wish  to  distinguish  between  the.sexes,  you  must 
add  to  it  the  word  man  or  woman.    Thus,  nekama  Unno  means 
he  or  this  man ;  nekama  ochqueu,  8he  or  thii  woman.    This  may 
appear  strange  to  a  person  exclusively  accustomed  to  our  forms 
of  speech ;  but  I  assure  you  the  Indians  have  no  difficulty  in 
understanding  each  other."    Correspondence  with  Mr,  Da  Pon- 
ceau, p.  368,  Letter  vii.    The  reader  will  observe  here  an  appa< 
rent  aifference  of  opinion  between  Eliot  and  Mr.  Heckewelder, 
in  respect  to  the  class  of  nouns,  in  which  vegetables  are  ranked 
in  these  two  dialects ;  the  former  calling  "  all  vegetables"  inani- 
mate,  and  the  latter  ranking  ""  trees  and  plants  (annual  plants  and 
grasses  excepted)  in  the  class  of  animated  beings."    This  appa- 
rent contradiction  was  alluded  to  in  Mr.  Du  Ponceau's  Jfotes  to 
Eliot's  Grammar  (p.  xiii.)  as  well  as  in  the  Introductory  Obser- 
vations to  the  same  work.    If  there  is,  in  reality,  this  difference 
between  two  kindred  dialects,  and  in  a  peculiar  characteristick 
of  I  he  Indian  languages,  the  fact  is  a  very  remarkable  one. 

In  the  Delaware  language  (according  to  Mr.  Zeisberger)  the 
male  of  quadrupeds  "  is  expressed  by  lenruneechum,  which  signi- 
fies  the  male  of  beasts,  thus — l4nnowechum  nenayunges,  moccaneu, 
goschgosch,  the  male  of  the  horse,  dog,  hog ;  and  of  fowls  and 
birds,  by  lennowehelleu,  the  male  of  fowls  and  birds...........The 

females  of  fowls  and  birds  are  called  ochquehhelleu,  and  those  of 
quadrupeds,  ochquechum,"  MS,  Grammar,  See  also  the  re- 
marks of  Mr.  Heckewelder  on  this  point,  in  the  letter  last  cited ; 
where  he  adds  (in  conformity  with  Mr.  Zeisberger  also)  that 
"  there  are  some  animals,  the  females  of  which  have  a  particular 
distinguishing,  name,  at  nunschetto,  a  doe }  nunscheach,  a  she- 
bear." 


i 


■5 


NOTE  4. 

The  Cases. 

'  P.  10.     ^  With  regard  to  cases,  they  haoe  but  one  variation 
from  the  nominative,"  &c. 

Eliot  also  observes,  that  in  the  Massachusetts  dialect,  the 
nouns  are  not  '*  varied  by  cases,  cadencies  and  endings ;"  he, 
however,  adds — ^^  yet  there  seemeth  to  be  one  cadency  or  case 
of  the  first  declination  of  the  form  animate,  which  endeth  in  oft, 
uh  or  ah,  viz.  when  an  animate  noun  followeth  a  verb  transitive, 
whose  object  that  he  acteth  upon  is  without  himself."  Gram. 
p.  8.    But  see  Mr.  Du  Ponceau^s  J^otes  on  Eltofs  Gram,  p.  ziv. 


m 


THE  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


27 


.The 


In  the  Delaware,  Mr.  Zeisberger  observes,  that  there  are 
"  no  declensions  as  we  have  in  our  language ;  but  this  makes 
no  deficiency  in  theirs,  as  their  place  is  sufficiently  supplied  by 
the  inseparable  pronouns  and  oy  verbs,  which  1  call  personal^ 
or  in  the  personal  mood,  because  I  do  not  know  of  another  name 
for  them."  *    MS.  Grammar. 

In  the  Mexican  language  (says  Gilij)  "the  noun  has  no  other 
inflexion,  than  that  wnich  serves  to  distinguish  the  singular  num- 
ber from  the  plural,  as  in  our  language.^'  Saggio  di  Storia 
Americana,  torn.  iii.  p.  329.  The  same  writer  observes,  also, 
that  "  in  none  of  the  Orinakese  languages  are  the  nouns  declined 
after  the  Greek  and  Latin  manner ;  for  they  have  onlv  two 
terminations,  for  the  singular  and  plural  numbers,  as  in  Italian.'' 
Ibid.  p.  162. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  Quichuan  (or  Peruvian)  language  is 
said  to  have,  in  addition  to  the  six  cases  of  the  Latin,  a  amenih 
case,  which  is  called  by  Father  Torres  Ruhio  the  effectivo  (the 
sien  of  which  is  with)  denoting,  sometimes  the  instrument  with 
which  an  act  is  done,  and  sometimes  the  co^xinnitancy  of  one  act 
with  another.t 


NOTE  5* 
The  ^fitmbers. 

P.  10.  "  The  plural  is  formed  by  adding  a  letttr  or  syllable  to 
the  singular,^^  Sic, 

One  of  the  most  remarkable  features  of  the  American  lan- 
guages is,  the  variety  and  mode  of  using  the  J^umbers  of  the 
nouns  and  pronouns.  Some  of  them  (the  Gtuiranese,  for  exam- 
ple) have  only  a  sir^lar  number,  and  are  destitute  of  a  distinct 
form  for  the  plural.  X  Some,  on  the  other  hand,  have  not  only 
the  singular  and  plural,  but  a  dual  also,  like  the  Greek  and  va- 
rious other  languages  of  the  eastern  continent;  while  a  third 


,  p.  xiv. 


*  In  the  South  American  languages  they  are  called,  by  the  Spanish  gram- 
marians, traruitiont. 

t  Arte  y  Vooabulario  de  la  Lengua  Quichua  General  de  los  Indios  de  el 
Peru.    Iitma,  1754. 

I  In  the  Chtararute  language  (which  is  the  common  fashionable  language 
of  Paraguay)  according  to  Gilt;',  **  the  plural  number  has  no  distinguishing 
marlc  from  that  which  is  called  the  singular.  To  designate  a  multitude,  the 
Guaranese  use  either  the  word  hetd  (many)  or  the  numerals  themselTes." 
Saggio  di  Storia  Jinuricanay  vol.  iii.  p.  251. 


28 


THE  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


class  of  them  has  nof  on^  a  singular,  dual  and  plural  (that  is 
the  common  unlimited  pli^al  of  the  European  languages)  but 
also  an  additional  plurali^hich  «s  denominated  bj  some  wri- 
ters the  exclusive  plural,  by  others  the  partieular  plural,  and 
by  others  the  limited  plural ;  but  which,  if  it  should  prov«  to  be 
peculiar  to  the  languages  of  this  continent,  might  very  properly 
be  called  the  American  plural,  as  was  suggested  on  a  former  oc- 
casion.  *  For  an  e|:planation  of  this  number  in  the  Delaware 
and  Chippewa^  languages,  the  reader  is  referred  to  the  Corres- 
pondence of  Mr,  Heckewelder  loith  Mr,  Du  Ponceau^  (Historical 
Transactions,  vol.  i.  p.  429.)  and  to  Mr.  Du  Ponceau's  Jfotes  on 
ElioCs  Grammar,  p.  xix.  To  the  remarks  there  made,  the  Edi- 
tor will  only  add  a  few  extracts  from  writers  on  the  South  Amer- 
ican languages,  to  show  the  general  resemblance  of  the  lan- 
guages in  different  parts  of  the  continent. 

Gilij,  in  his  a(  "^unt  of  the  languages  of  the  Orinoco  country, 
after  mentioning  t  .  great  simplicity  of  the  nouns  (which  have 
no  cases)  makes  the  following  observations  upon  the  use  of  the 
nouns  in  composition  with  the  pronouns  of  the  different  num- 
bers : 

"  But,  easy  as  the  knowledge  of  the  inflexions  of  the  nouns 
is,  when  they  are  used  by  themselves  and  unconnected  with  a 
person,  it  is  excessively  difficult  and  perplexing  to  acquire  the 
various  and  inconceivable  inflexions  of  the  contracted  [or  com- 
-bined]  nouns.  I  shall  presently  speak  of  the  primitive  pronouns, 
and  the  particles  which  distinguish  them ;  but  at  present  I  shall 
speak  of  the  inflexions  of  the  nouns ;  and  it  is  necessary  to 
mention  che  numerous  ones,  which  those  nouns  have,  that  1  call 
contracted, 

"  Let  us,  then,  take  a  nouji  %vhich  begins  with  a  vowel ;  for 
example,  the  word  apoto,  a  rule.  As  it  stands  here,  indeed,  it 
is  an  absolute  and  independent  word ;  but  in  contracting  (or 
combining)  it  with  the  particles  of  the  possessive  pronouns,  it 
is  declined,  if  I  may  so  speak,  in  the  following  manner : 

Japotoi my  rule*  t 

Avapotoi thy  rule. 

Itapotoi his  rule. 

"  Thus  far  every  thing  is  not  only  clear,  but  methodical ;  but 
at  this  point  the  embarrassment  of  novices  in  the  language  be- 

*  See  Notes  on  Eliot^s  Grammar,  p.  xix. 

t  The  reader  will  take  care  to  pronounce  these  words  according  to  the 
powers  of  the  Italian  alphabet. 


(fU 


.  y 


THE  INDIAN  LAHOUAOES. 


29 


gins.  Jumnaje^toi  U  ova  ruk ;  but  the  word  for  wtr  is  not  a 
word,  which  can  be  applied  alike  in  all  cases ;  though  it  may 
be  used  on  some  occasions,  it  must  not  be  on  all.  L«i  us  give 
an  example  to  illustrate  this  metaphysical  point :' 

"■  When  a  Tnmmkacaan,  in  addressing  \u  [£Mreigners]  says  in 
his  own  language,  jummtjtmotdi  patcurbe^  (oua  rule  is  good)  the 
expression  is  correct  and  el^aat.  But  nay  it  hence  be  infer- 
red, that  he  can  use  the  same  expression  in  addressing  kU  otvn 
^Amntrymen  f  By  no  means.  If  his  discourse  is  directed  to  ont 
only,  he  must  say  capotm^  that  is,  our  (rule)  of  ustmo ;  in  which 
case  the  dual  of  the  Greeks  occurs.  But  perhaps  the  speaker 
would  address  hunself  to  seoeralo!  his  countrymen ;  and  in  that 
case  he  can  no  longer  make  use  of  the  word  caixrfoi,  but  must 
have  recourse  to  another  word,  which  is  limited,  in  some  sort, 
to  the  persons  spoken  to,  but  cannot  be  applied  to  others ;  that 
is,  capotdi<hemd^  our  rule  of  us  alone.  This  precision  is  some- 
thing very  different  from  barbarous.  The  dual  number,  indeed, 
is  not  new  to  the  learned}  bnt  hitherto  they  have  not  been 
aware  of  a  plural,  which  was  only  applicable  to  a  limited  num- 
ber of  persons,  as  we  see  in  the  expression  capotdi-chetno  and 
the  like.  In  my  MS.  Grammar  of  the  Tamanacan  language,  I 
have  called  this  mode  of  speech  the  determinate  pluraV^  The 
author  afterwards,  referring  his  readers  to  what  is  here  said  of 
the  numbers  of  the  nouns,  observes,  that  precisely  the  same  pe- 
culiarity exists  in  the  numbers  of  the  verbs,  * 

The  same  writer,  in  speaking  of  the  language  of  the  Incas 
(which,  he  observes,  is  very  extensively  spoken)  has  the  fol- 
lowing observations  on  this  point : 

"  It  is  to  be  noted  (as  before  observed  in  the  case  of  the 
Tamanacan  language)  that  the  pronoun  we  is  expressed  in  two 
ways.  If  the  persons  spoken  to  arc  included  with  the  person 
speaking,  v.  g.  toe  (Italians)  love  literature,  the  idea  is  to  be  ex- 
pressed, when  other  Italians  are  thus  spoken  to,  by  the  pro- 
noun gnocancis  ;  but  if  the  word  we  is  addressed  to  foreigners, 

then  it  must  be  expressed  by  gnocaicu  ; thus,  jajancis  is  our 

father,  when  another  person  is  included ;  but  when  such  other 
is  excluded,  jajdicu  must  be  used.....The  verb,  in  the  first  person 
plural,  has  the  same  variation  that  has  been  mentioned  in  the 
pronoun  zoc." 

In  the  language  of  Cichitto,  [Chiquito]  also,  he  observes,  that 
"  there  is,  in  the  first  person  plural,  the  inclusive  number,  as  it 


*  Saggio,  &c.  vol.  iii,  pp.  163  and  181. 


30 


THE  INDIAN  LAN0UA6EB. 


is  called,  and  the  exclusive  number,  exactly  as  in  the  language 
of  the  JncaaJ"  ♦ 

GUij  also  mentions  a  singularity  in  the  languages  of  the  Ori- 
noco ;  which  is,  that  the  plural  form  of  nouns  is  not  applied  to 
irrational  animals ;  but  in  order  to  denote  the  plural  m  such 
cases,  they  annex  to  the  noun  a  numeral,  or  some  word  of  multi- 
tude ;  as,  I  saw  two.  three  or  many  tigers,  &c.  But,  again,  in 
the  case  of  inanimate  beings,  they  use  the  plural  number ;  as, 
mata,  the  field,  ma/ac-ne,  the  fields;  cene,  this  thing,  cenec-ne, 
these  things,  &c.  t 

In  the  language  of  Chili  (according  to  Febres)  the  noun  has 
an  analogy  to  the  nouns  of  the  eastern  languages,  in  having 
three  numbers,  the  singular,  dual  and  plural.  | 


NOTE  6. 
Tfte  Pronoun  Relative, 

P.  IS.  "  They  have  no  relative  correspondir^  to  our  who  or 
which." 

Both  the  Delaware  and  the  Massachusetts  languages  have 
this  relative  pronoun  {See  Mr.  Du  Ponceau's  Notes  on  Eliofs 
Grammar^  p.  xx.)  and  it,  therefore,  appears  strange,  that  a  dia< 
lect  so  closely  allied  as  the  Mohegan  should  be  destitute  of  it. 
Yet  it  seems  hardly  possible,  that  Dr.  Edwards  could  have  been 
mistaken  in  this  particular. 

The  same  deficiency  is  found  in  some  of  the  languages  of 
Soiuth  America.  In  the  Q^ichuan  (says  Torres  Rubio)  "  there 
is  no  simple  word  to  express  the  relative  quis  or  9ut.....but  the 
relatives  are  expressed  by  the  participles,"  &c.  And  Gilij 
says  the  same  thmg  of  the  other  side  of  the  continent.  ".  The 
Orinokese  (says  he)  know  nothing  of  the  relative  pronouns  teho, 
tohich^  &c.  but  they  nevertheless  employ  certam  expressions 
instead  of  them,  which  very  well  supply  their  place.  In  the 
Tamanacan  they  supply  the  above  relatives  by  the  particle 
manecci ;    v»  g.  Pare  Cabruf-po  mantcci  patcurhe^  the  Father 


*  Saggio,  &c.  pp.  236,  237  and  246.    See  also  Tomt  AufttoV  Arte,  &c. 
pp.  6  and  52. 

t  Saggio,  &c.  162. 

if.  Arte  de  la  Lengua  general  del  Reyno  de  tJhile,  p.  8.  '     * 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAOEB. 


SI 


tnguage 

;he  On- 
plied  to 
in  such 
»f  multi- 
igain,  in 
ler;  as, 
ctmc-nef 

oun  has 
having 


who  or 

es  have 
Eliofs 
at  a  dia* 
ite  of  it. 
ive  been 

uages  of 
"  there 
)ut  the 

nd  Gilij 
"The 

iins  leho, 

>res$ions 
In  the 

particle 
Father 


Arte,  &c. 


who  (or  be)  is  in  Cabnita,  is  eood.  But  sometimes,  by  a  la- 
conism,  thej^  employ  only  the  Tatter  part  of  that  word  ;  v.  g. 
Ctongatc  pe  itegdti  Fare  nqiui  necci^  what  is  the  name  of  the  Fa<* 
ther  who  is  come  ?  "  The  Maipuri,  instead  of  the  above,  make 
use  of  the  particle  ri ;  v.  g.  Jaammuri  caniacauy  tacau  cattirche^ 
he  who  is  bad  goes  to  hell."  * 


NOTE  7. 
The  Mjeetives,  and  Degrees  of  Comparison. 

Pp.  11,  13.    "  The  Mohegana  have  no  adjectives  m  all  their 

language, As  they  have  no  adjectives^  of  course  they  have  no 

comparison  of  adjectives.'''' 

Mr.  Zeisbereer,  in  speaking  of  the  Delaware  language,  ex- 
presses himself  in  more  qualified  terms :  "  There  are  not  many 
of  these  [adjectives]  because  those  words,  which  with  us  are 
adjectives,  here  are  verbs ;  and,  although  they  are  not  inflected 
through  all  the  persons,  yet  they  have  tenses.    The  adjectives, 
properly  so  called,  end  in  uwi  and  ont,  and  are  derived  some- 
times from  substantives  and  sometimes  from  verbs.    Ex,  Gena- 
mutoj,  grateful,  from  genam^  thanks ;  wemoatamowi,  wise,  prudent, 
from  wewoatam,  to  be  wise......There  are  also  adjectives  with 

•ther  terminations ;  as, 

Nenapalek unworthy,  good  for  nothing. 

Woapelechen    .....  white. 

Asgask green. 

Allowa'  allohak  ....  powerful,  strong. 

Ktemaki poor,  miserable,  infirm,"  &c. 

MS,  Oram. 

In  the  languages  of  South  America,  also,  the  verbs  serve  as  ad- 
jectives. See  Febres''  Grammar  of  the  Language  of  Chili,  p.  29. 
On  the  subject  of  the  comparison  of  adjectives  Edwards  ob- 
serves, that  the  Mohegans,  in  order  to  express  degrees  of 
comparison,  use  an  adverb  with  their  verbs  that  express  quali- 
ties ;  of  which  he  gives  this  example — "  annuwuweh  wnissoo,  he 
is  more  beautiful." 


*  Saggio,  &c.  p.  167. 


as 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAOE8. 


In  tbc  Delatoare^  also,  according  to  Zeisbergcr,  tbc  degreett 
are  distiDguished  in  a  similar  manner.  The  comparative  degree 
is  expressed  by  the  wcrd  allowiwi  (allou>  wee,  as  it  would  be 
written  in  our  Ekiglish  orthography)  thus :  "  WulU,  good ; 
allowim  viulity  more  good,  better."  MS,  Gram,  The  word 
allowiwii  it  will  be  observed,  is  the  same  with  the  Mohegan 
anuweeweh ;  the  letter  /  of  the  Delaware  being  changed  (accord- 
ing to  the  general  rule  in  these  two  kindred  dialects)  into  n  in 
the  Mohegan, 

The  same  mode  of  expressing  this  degree  of  comparison  was 
used  in  the  Massachuaetts  language ;  in  which  also  the  adverb 
employed  for  the  purpose  was  substantially  the  same  with  those 
of  the  Delaware  and  the  Mohegan.  "  There  is  (says  Eliot)  no 
form  of  comparison  that  I  can  yet  finde,  but  degrees  are  ex- 
pressed  by  a  word  signifying  more ;  as  anue  menuhkesUf  more 
•trong,"  &c    Gram.  p.  1 5. 

In  some  languages  of  the  other  parts  of  this  continent,  also, 
the  same  thing  has  been  noticed.  In  the  Mexican  language 
(says  Gilij)  ''comparatives  are  not  formed  by  a  new  word 
distinguishable  from  the  positive  word,  but  by  the  adverb 
occacci,  which  signifies  more;  v.  g.  In  tiuatl  occacci  Hqualii, 
thou  art  more  good  than  he."  Saggio^  8ic,  torn.  iii.  p.  330. 
The  same  author  informs  us,  that  the  Orinokese  "  are  entireljjr 
destitute  of  comparatives ;  and  their  speech  resembles  in  this 
respect  the  Hebrew.  Universally,  vrhere  one  person  is  com- 
pared  with  another,  they  employ  a  negative  mode  of  expres* 
uon,  and  instead  of  saying  sucA  on  one  is  bttter  than  smother,  they 
r.ay,  such  an  one  is  good,  and  such  an  ovu  u  bod."  Hid,  p.  166. 
He  makes  a  similar  remark  in  respect  to  the  language  of  the 
province  of  Cichitto  [Chiquito"]  which  is  near  the  middle  of 
South  America.  Proceeding  still  farther  south,  we  find  the 
same  thing  in  the  language  of  Chili :  "  Comparatives  (says 
Father  Febres)  are  formed  by  means  of  the  particles  yod 
or  doy  ;  v.  e.  Pu  Patiru  yod  cumey  pu  Huinca  mo^  the  Fathers 
are  better  than  the  Spaniards ;  or  thus — Pu  Huinca  cimey,  ftu- 
elu  pu  Patiru  yod  cumey,  the  Spaniards  are  good,  but  the  Fa- 
thers are  more  good ;  or  thus,  by  making  a  verb  of  ^  or  dwf — 
Pu  Patiru  yodvi  dimegen  mo  tapu  Huinca ;  that  is,  the  Fathers 
are  more  than,  or  exceed,  the  Spaniards  in  goodness."  * 

*  Arte  de  la  Lengua,  &c.  p.  54.  •       ^  i 


THE  miMAN    LANOUAOEa. 


33 


NOTE  8. 


P.  \3t,    ^A  coniiderable  part  of  the   tqipellatives   are    never 
used  without  a  pronoun  affixed^  &c. 

Mr.  Da  Ponceau,  in  his  interesting  Correspondence  with  Mr. 
Heckewelder,  has  the  following  remark  upon  this  passage :  "  On 
the  subject  of  the  word  father^  I  observe  a  strange  contradic- 
tion between  two  eminent  writers  on  Indian  languages  evidently 
derived  from  the  stock  of  the  Lenni  Lenape  or  Delaware.   One 
of  them,  Roger  Wil'tiams,  in  his  Key  to  the  Laneuage  of  the 
New  Eneland  Indians,  says  ^osh*  (meaning  probably  och  or 
ooch,  as  the  English  cannot  pronounce  the  guttural  ch)  father  ; 
NOSH,  my  father  i  kosh,  thy  father^  &c.    On  the  other  hand,  the 
Rev.  Jonathan  Edwards,  in  his  Observations  on  the  Language 
of  the  Muhhtkaneew  (Mohican)  Indians,  speaks  as  follows — ^  A 
considerable  part  of  the  appellatives  are  never  used  without  a 
pronoun  affixed.    The  Moheeans  say,  my  father,  nogh  (acain 
noch  or  nooch)  thy  father,  ko^i^  &c.  but  they  cannot  say  abso- 
lutely father.    There  is  no  such  word  in  their  language.     If 
you  were  to  say  ogh^  you  would  make  a  Mohezan  both  stare 
and  smile.' "    Mr.  Du  Ponceau  then  asks—"  which  of  these  two 
professors  is  right  V    To  which  Mr.  Heckewelder  makes  the 
following  reply :  "  Notwithstanding  Mr.  Edwards'  observation 
(for  whom  1  feel  the  highest  respect)  I  cannot  help  being  of 
opinion,  that  the  monosyllable  ooch  is  the  proper  word  for  fa- 
ther, abstractedly  considered,  and  that  it  is  as  proper  to  say  ooch, 
father,  and  nooch,  my  father,  as  dallemous,  beast,  and  n'dallemous, 
my  beast ;  or  nitschan,  child,  (or  a  child)  and  n''nitschan,  my 
child.    It  is  certain,  however,  that  there  are  few  occasions  for 
using  these  words  in  their  abstract  sense,  as  there  are  so  many 
ways  of  associating  them  with  other  ideas.     Wetoochwink  and 
wetochemuxit  both  mean  '  the  father'  in  a  more  definite  sense, 
and  loetochemelmk  is  used  in  the  vocative  sense,  and  means  *  thou 
our  father.'    I  once  heard  Captain  Pipe,  a  celebrated  Indian 
chief,  address  the  British  commandant  at  Detroit,  and  he  said, 
rooch!  my  father.'*^ 

In  consequence  of  this  difference  of  opinion,  the  Editor,  in  the 
course  of  the  last  year,  addressed  a  letter  on  the  subject  to  the 
Rev.  Herman  Daggett,  the  Superintendant  of  the  Foreign  Mis- 
sionary School  at  Cornwall,  in  Connecticut.  In  addition  to 
the  Naraganset  Vocabulary  of  Roger  Williams,  reference  was 


*  Correspond,  of  Mr.  Heckewelder  and  Mr.  Dn  Ponceau,  pp.  403  &  411. 


1 

j^ 


34 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAOE8. 


I 


made  to  a  specimen  of  the  Mohegan  languaee  (taken  from  the 
mouth  of  an  educated  native  by  the  Rev.  William  Jenks)  which 
is  published  in  the  Hittorkal  VolUctiontf  vol.  ix.  p.  98,  Firit  St- 
riet,  and  in  which  the  word  (or  father  is  given  without  any  pro- 
nominal affix.  Mr.  Daggett's  reply  was  as  follows—'*  1  am 
satisfied,  that  there  is  no  word  in  any  of  the  Indian  languages 
used  in  the  Foreign  Missionary  School,  by  which  to  express  in 
the  abstract  the  relation  of  Father  and  most  of  the  other  social 
relations.  ^Adam  was  the  father  of  all  men*  is  a  sentence, 
which  my  Indian  scholars  say  they  cannot  translate  without  a 
chanee  of  expression.  The  Choctaws  brought  me  the  following 
— A&m  qwhkut-tu^^-moomah  Ins-ha  yut-tok ;  but  they  observed 
that  Ing-ka  had  the  pronominal  prefix  of  the  third  person  sin- 
gular, which  they  said  was  unavoidable."  * 

To  these  remarks  it  is  only  necessary  to  add  one  other,  res< 
pecting  the  Delaware  word  oochy  above  mentioned.  It  must  not 
De  supposed  (as  has  been  conjectured)  that  this  word,  like  the 
Cherokee  term  Ing-ka,  may  comprehenc*  an  afiix  of  the  third 
person  singular ;  for  the  Delaware  has  a  distinct  form  for  the 
third  person  singular,  which  is,  "  oocAzca//,  his  or  her  father." 
S^itberger'e  MS,  Gram,  ^ 


NOTE  9. 


The  P*rh  To  Be. 
"  They  hace  no  verb  svbatantive  in  all  their  Ian- 


14. 

n 


P. 

giMUfe. 

The  want  of  this  verb  in  many  of  the  American  laneuages, 
is  one  of  their  most  remarkable  characteristicks.  The  fact 
here  stated>by  Edwards,  in  respect  to  the  Mohegan,  corresponds 
with  what  Eliot  had  observed,  a  century  and  an  half  before,  in 
the  Massachusetts,  and  with  what  the  Rev.  Mr.  Heckewelder 
has  lately  said  of  the  common  stock  of  both  those  dialects, 
the  Delaware;  in  which,  says  he,  ''the  late  Mr.  Zeisberger 
^nd  myself  sought  many  years  in  vain  for  this  substantive 
verb.....I  cannot  find  a  single  instance  in  the  language,  in  which 
the  verb  /  am  is  used  by  itself,  that  is  to  say,  uncombined  with 

*  The  resemblance  between  this  Choctaw  word  for  Father  and  the  Peru* 
vian  Inca  (which  was  first  suggested  bj  Mr.  Du  Ponceau)  is  a  little  remark- 
able. 

• 


Tire  INDIAN   LANOUAOl 


tan- 


in 


Peru- 
imark- 


the  iden  of  the  act  to  be  done.*^  Mr.  Heckewelder,  in  addition 
to  Mr.  Zeisbergcr^s  and  hi»  own  opinion,  gives  also  that  ol  ih« 
Rev.  Mr.  Dtnact  to  the  same  effect,  in  regard  to  the  Chif)p«- 
tony  as  well  an  the  Delaware.*  Mr.  Dii  Ponceau,  who  has  ex- 
tended his  inquiries  to  many  other  dialects  both  of  North  and 
South  America,  was  originally  inclined  to  believe,  that  *^  the 
want  of  the  subHtanlive  verb  was  a  general  rule  in  the  Indian 
languages."  t  But  subsequent  researches  (as  he  observes  in  a 
late  letter  to  the  Kditor)  have  led  him  to  doubt,  whether  that 
will  prove  to  be  the  case,  to  the  extent  in  which  his  remarks 
will  naturally  have  been  understood  by  his  readers.  This 
question  is  briefly  discussed  in  the  Jsotea  on  ElinCa  Indian 
Grammar,  published  in  the  preceding  volume  of  these  Collec- 
tions; to  which  the  reader  is  referred.!  But  it  may  not  be 
without  use,  at  the  present  early  period  of  these  investigations, 
to  add  in  this  (jiace,  by  way  of  caution  to  the  student,  some 
further  remarks  upon  the  subject. 

We  must  not  suddenly  inter,  that  the  American  languages 
have  a  verb  substantive,  because  we  happen  to  find  in  some 
of  the  grammars  a  certain  verb  under  that  name,  and  a  conju- 
gation of  it  in  due  form,  just  as  would  be  found  in  the  langua- 
fes  of  the  European  authors  of  those  works.  Every  man,  who 
as  studied  the  modern  languages,  knows,  that  several  of  them 
have  two  distinct  verbs  (derived  from  the  Latin  stare  and  mm 
respectively)  in  the  use  of  which  there  is  a  well-settled  distinc- 
tion, that  prevents  their  ever  being  confounded  in  the  langua- 
ges to  which  they  belong,  but  yet  in  translating,  either  from  or 
into,  a  foreign  language,  this  distinction  is  continually  dis- 
regarded ;  as  in  English,  for  example,  we  should  render  them 
both  by  our  single  verb  to  6e,  though  this  would  often  be  an  in- 
correct representation  of  their  true  unport.  Every  one,  also,  (as 
Mr.  Du  Ponceau  has  justly  observed)  must  "  know  too  well  the 
inclination  of  grammarians  to  assimilate  those  [Indian]  idioms 
to  their  own,  to  be  shaken  by  paradigms,  in  which  the  verb  s/o, 
for  instance,  might  be  translated  by  sum,  or  I  am,  for  want  of 
sufficient  attention  to  the  shade  of  difference  between  them."  J 
In  order,  therefore,  to  arrive  at  a  satisfactory  conclusion  on 
this  point,  it  becomes  necessary  for  us  to  do  something  more 
than  adopt  the  general  remarks  of  grammarians,  or  the  loose 
translations  of  interpreters ;  we  must  examine  critically  some 
of  the  principal  dialects  of  each  stock  of  languages  in  the  differ- 
ent  parts  of  the  continent.     With  a  view  to  this  object,  the 

*  Letter  to  Mr.  Du  Ponceau,  in  the  Not«f  on  Eliot's  Gram.  p.  xxvii. 
t  See  Notes,  p.  xxir.  %  Ibid.  p.  xxri. 

6 


36 


THE  INDIAN  LANGUAOIfl. 


Editor  has  thought  it  might  be  useful,  at  the  present  time,  to 
take  a  very  briefrcvicw  of  some  of  the  facts,  which  have  been 
ascrrtaincd  in  this  case,  in  respect  to  a  few  of  the  Northern  as 
well  as  the  So^it'tem  languages  of  this  continent. 

1.  The  Horth  American  Lanffuagta,  In  respect  to  some  of 
the  languages  of  ^orth  America,  we  are  already  possessed  of 
ail  the  information  that  can  be  desired  on  this  point ;  and  the 
question  mny  be  considered  as  fully  settled  ;  but  of  others,  we 
cannot  yet  speak  with  so  much  certainty.  The  DWaicare, 
which,  according  to  Mr.  Ileckewelder,  is  the  moat  widely  ex- 
tended of  any  on  this  side  of  the  Mississippi,  is  ascertained  to 
have  no  substantive  verb.  This  we  have  upon  the  authority  of 
Mr.  Zeisberger  and  Mr.  Hcckewelder;  neither  of  whom,  after 
the  strictest  examination,  could  discover  such  a  verb  in  the 
language.  To  these  may  also  be  added  the  authority  of  the 
Rev.  Mr.  Dmcke,  the  missionary  of  the  United  Brethren  in 
Upper  Canada.  *  Of  the  numerous  dialects  of  this  stock,  our 
information  is  also  entirely  satisfactory  in  respect  to  the  Miu- 
tachusttts,  the  Mohesian  and  the  Chippetoay^  the  last  of  which  is 
very  extensively  spoken  among  the  northern  tribes.  For  the 
first  of  these,  we  have  the  authority  of  Eliol;  for  the  second, 
that  of  Edwards ;  and  for  the  last,  tnat  of  Mr.  Dtnckt.  t  From 
what  we  thus  find  to  be  the  case  in  the  Delaware  stock  itself, 
as  well  as  in  the  three  dialects  just  mentioned,  there  seems  to 
be  no  hazard,  then,  in  making  the  inference,  that  its  other  va- 
rious dialects  will  also  be  found  to  have  no  substantive  verb. 
The  Iroquois  stock  (if  we  mny  judge  of  all  the  dialects  by  those 
which  have  been  the  oubject  of  inquiry)  seems  to  be  also  desti« 
tute  of  this  verb.  The  inquiries  made  by  the  Rev.  Mr.  Daggett 
of  the  different  Indian  pupils  of  that  stock,  who  are  under  his 
care  at  the  Foreign  Missionary  School  in  Connecticut,  (the  re- 
sult of  which  was  published  by  the  Editor  in  the  Notes  on 
Eliot's  Grammar)  seem  to  leave  little  or  no  room  for  doubt  in 
respect  to  this  family  of  languages.  The  particular  dialects 
examined  by  him  were,  the  Orieida,  Tuscarora  and  Caughntwnfra, 
Of  the  Floridian  family  (as  Mr.  Heckewelder  denominates  it, 
meaning  to  comprehend  the  dialects  spoken  by  the  Indians  on 
the  soutnern  frontier  of  the  United  States)  we  have  not  so  ample 
information  as  of  the  languages  already  mentioned  ;  but  from 
the  inquiries  made  at  the  Missionary  School  respecting  two  of 
its  dialects  (the  Choctaw  and  Cherokee)  it  should  seem,  that  the 
substantive  verb  is  wanting.    Yet,  on  the  other  hand,  the  Rev. 


*  Notes  to  Eliot's  Grammar,  p.  xxviii. 


t  Ibid. 


THE  INDIAN  LANQUAODI. 


37 


Mr.  Bul^rick,  the  present  miMionary  among  the  Cherokeen  (in 
one  uf  his  early  communications  on  this  subject,  for  which  the 
£ditor  is  indebted  to  a  learned  friend)  expressly  mentiona  a 
peculiar  manner  of  using  what  he  calls  tht  iub$tantivt  verb ; 
observing,  that  "  the  verb  to  be  is  not  used  in  the  present  tense, 
and  I  think  not  in  the  imperfect.  Instead  of  this,  changes  are 
made  "In .  the  beginning  of  the  word,  which  would  otherwise 
follow  it ;  as,  A  ski  ya,  man — tse  tkl  yd,  I  am  a  ronn,^^  &c. 
Whether  his  subsequent  study  of  the  language  has  confirmed 
this  observation  or  not,  the  Editor  is  unable  to  slate*  * 

2.  The  South  American  Lat^ptagea,  Some  of  these  appear 
to  have  the  substantive  verb,  though  it  seems  to  be  more  limited 
in  its  use,  than  is  the  case  in  the  European  languages ;  while  in 
others,  the  same  mode  of  expressing  it  is  adopted,  which  is 
found  in  the  languages  of  the  J^orth ;  that  is,  annexing  a  sylla- 
ble  or  particle  to  the  noun,  which  changes  it  into  a  verb.  Gilij^ 
after  okserving  that  every  language  must  have  its  peculiarities, 
its  excellencies  and  defects,  makes  the  following  general  re> 
marks  on  the  verb  substantive  of  the  Orinokese  dialects  : 

''  These  same  reasons  are  most  conclusive  against  those  per- 
sons,  who  would  have,  in  some  of  the  American  languages,  the 
verb  sum  precisely  as  it  is  in  the  Latin.  I  say  in  some^  and  not 
all  of  them,  as  many  boast.  In  the  Tamanacan  (to  speak  of 
one  which  is  best  known  to  me)  thtkC  is  the  verb  uocct/t,  a  sub- 
stantive  verb  like  esse  in  Latin  ;  uocd,  I  was ;  uoccicci,  I  shall 
be,  &c.  But  he,  who  should  expect  to  find  it  in  every  tense, 
as  in  Italian  or  Latin,  would  be  egregiously  mistaken.  All  the 
Indians  known  to  mc  (and  not  merely  the  Tamanacans)  make 
no  use  of  the  substantive  verb  in  the  signification  of  the  present. 
The  following  are  examples  from  r.hree  of  their  languages.  In 
the  Tamanacan,  patcurbe  ure ;  in  the  M aipuri,  sonirri  cana ;  in 
the  Pajuri,  repeju^  all  signify  merely  I  good"  i 

This  author,  in  another  place,  observes,  that  "  the  above- 
mentioned  verb  substantive  becomes  equivalent  to  the  Latin  Jio^ 
wherever,  instead  of  uocctVt,  they  say  uoic  tari;  and  it  is  thus 
the  root,  if  I  may  so  speak,  of  the  verbs  that  end  in  tari ;  v.  g. 
Ponghemtari,  to  become  a  Spaniard ;  Tamandcutari^  to  become 
a  Tamanacan."]:  In  the  Chiaranese  language,  he  says,  that  one 
class  of  neuter  verbs  "  is  formed  by  noun  substantives  or  ad- 
jectives united  to  the  oronouns  ce,  nae^  &lc,  ;  v.  g.  ce  mdrdngattt, 

*  It  is  a  curious  fact,  that  this  very  mode  of  using  what  is  considered  as  the 
substantive  vorb,  is  found  in  some  of  the  SoiUh  American  languages.  See 
the  observation  of  Gilij,  respecting  the  Orinokese  dialects,  in  the  following 

pages. 

t  Saggio,  &c.  p.  302.  %  Ibid.  p.  180. 


38 


T!lE   II7DIAN   LANGUAGES. 


I  good ;  nde  mirmgatu^  thou  good.  And  this  (says  my  aathor) 
is  precisely  the  conjugation  of  the  verb  substantive  esatrr^  to 
be.  In  fact,  all  nouns  united  (or  conjugated)  with  the  pronouns 
become  verbs,  and  include  the  verb  substantive."*  In  the 
Maipuri  language  he  also  speaks  of  the  passive  voice  being 
formed  by  the  termination  au,  which  they  take  from  "  the  sub* 
stantive  verb  caniacau ;  but  he  says,  at  the  same  time,  tlht  this 
verb  is  the  Italian  essere  or  stare ;  and  in  another  place  he 
renders  the  same  verb  by  the  Italian  stare  alone,  and  not  by 
essere.  t 

On  crossing  the  continent  of  America  from  the  Orinoco 
country  into  Prru^  we  find  in  the  Qukkuan,  or  General  Lan- 
guage  of  the  latter  region,  a  verb  called  by  grammarians  the 
substantive  verb  of  that  language  ;  that  is,  cant,  which  is  con- 
jugated at  large  in  the  valuable  Grammar  of  Father  Torres  RubiOf 
and  has  every  appearance  of  the  true  substantive  verb.  In  ad- 
dition to  this,  it  may  be  remarked,  that  this  verb  is  also  used  in 
forming  the  passive  voice  of  other  verbs,  by  being  joined  with 
their  participles.  Yet  it  will  be  observed  that  this  same  verb 
cant  seems  to  have  the  signification  of  stare  as  well  as  tfse. 
The  author  at  fol.  \bl  of  his  Vocabulario,  or  Dictionary,  gives 
this  example  :  **  Cani^  I  am  [i.  e.  sum  vel  sto]  as,  Cozcopi  cant, 
I  am  [sum  vel  sto]  at  Cuzco."  Nor  does  there  appear  to  be, 
in  this  work  any  distinct  word  for  the  verb  stare.  But  what- 
ever may  be  the  true  character  of  this  Quichuan  verb,  we  find 
that  in  the  language  of  the  Province  of  Chiquitos  *^  the  verb  sub- 
stantive is  wholly  wanting  ;  and  they  supply  its  place  by  means 
of  the  pronouns  and  in  other  ways."| 

Proceeding  still  farther  south,  however,  we  again  find,  in  the 
language  of  Chili^  the  substantive  verb  ;  for  so  the  grammari- 
ans of  that  language  denominate  it.  Father  Fehres  says,  *^  Ab- 
stract nouns,  as  goodness^  whiteness^&LC  are  formed  by  annexing 
gen  (which  is  the  verb  sum^  »,  est)  to  adjectives  or  substan- 
tives; V.  g,  cumegrn,  goodness;  lighgen,  whiteness,"  ||  &c.  Yet 
the  author,  in  one  of  his  dictionaries  (annexed  to  the  Grammar) 
renders  the  Spanish  verbs  haver  and  tener,  as  well  as  the  sul> 
Stantive  verb  Mr,  by  this  same  Chilese  word  gen  ;  and,  in  his 
Other  dictionary,  he  explains  the  Chilese  gen  by  the  several 
Spanish  verbs  fer^  e«tor,  haber,  tener^  and  nacer,  §    The  Editor 


•  Saggio,  Ac.  p.  966,  t  Ibid.  p.  187,  189, 

%  Gilij,  Sagpo,  &c.  p.  94% 

|[  Arte,  Sic.  p.  61.    ^.  if  this  Chilese  word  gen  has  any  alSnity  with  the 
Qvichuan  cani .' 

I  P.  494, 


THE  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


will  close  these  remarks  by  mentioning,  that  Mr.  Du  Ponceaa 
(in  a  late  letter)  is  inclined  to  believe,  that  the  Quichuan  verb 
cani  is  the  pure  substantive  verb  ;  observing  very  justly,  that 
**the  general  character  of  the  Indian  languages  does  not  prevent 
varieties  from  existing  in  them  ;  but  the  germs  is  still  the  same* 
Those  varieties,  time  and  study  will  discover." 


NOTE  10. 


Verbs  farmed  out  of  JVouiis. 


in  the 
immari- 
Is, "  Ab- 
[nnexing 
mbstan- 
X.   Yet 
lammar) 
|he  sub- 
in  his 
several 
Editor 


with  tjhe 


P.  1 4.  ^  Thu3  they  turn  any  substantive  whattcer  into  a  verb 
neuter^^"*  &,c. 

So  in  the  Massachusetts  language,  Eliot  observes,  that  nouns 
may  be  turned  into  verbs  and  verbs  into  nouns.*    To  the  same 
effect  Mr.  Zeisberger  says  of  the  Delaware — that  "  substan- 
tives, and  also  adverbs,  assume  the  character  of  verbs,  as  we 
have  already  said  of  adjectives."  t    The  same  thing  takes  place 
in  the  South  American  languages.     Oi/y,  in  speaking  of  the 
Orinokese  dialects,  says — *^  Every  noun  [in  the  Tamanacan] 
may  he  made  into  a  verb......as,   Tamanacu,  a  Tamanacan ; 

Tamanacutari^  to  become  a  Tamanacan."  X    ^^  ^^  ^^^  Chilese 
(says  Pebres)  "  verbs  are  made  from  nouns  by  adding  n  ;  and 
the  same  thing  may  be  done  with  almost  all  the  other  parts  of 
speech,  as  pronouns,  participles,  adverbs,  &c.  ....and,  on  the 

other  hand,  the  verbs  are  changed  into  nouns,  by  taking  away 
the  final  n,  and  sometimes  without  taking  it  away."  || 


NOTE  11. 

3%e  Tenses. 

P.  15.    "  They  have  a  past  and  future  tense  to  their  verbs,"  &c. 

The  author  here  states  a  very  curious  fact  respecting  a  mode 
of  expressing  the  future  tense ;  which  is  done  by  annexing  the 
sign  of  the  future  to  an  adverb  or  other  word  in  the  sentence. 


*  Indian  Gram.  pp.  13  and  SI. 

t  MS.  Gram.  Mr.  Du  Ponceau^B  tranilation. 

I  Saggio,  4(0.  p.  17S. 


II  Arte,  kc.  p.  66. 


40 


THE  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


**  This  (as  Mr.  Du  Ponceau  justly  observes  in  a  letter  to  the 
Editor)  is  in  analogy  with  the  Delaware ;  in  which  the  sign  of 
the  future  is  affixed  to  the  adverb,  not  (for  example)  as — attoTscH 
pendawite  for  atta  pendatoiterscH^  if  I  shall  not  hear ;  or,  to  the 
adverb  at^  as  in  torscH  elsiya  for  ta  ehiyarscii^  as  I  shall  be 
situated."  By  a  similar  analogy  the  oronominal  affixes  of  the 
nouns  and  verbs  in  the  Massachusetts  language  may  be  joined 
to  the  adverb  or  adjective  ;*  and  the  folTowmg  observation  of 
Gilij  may  be  intended  to  describe  something  of  the  kind  in  the 
Orinokese  languages  also :  "  I  shall  mention  (says  he)  a  most  ex* 
traordinary  thing,  but,  at  the  same  time,  what  is  a  matter  of 
fact;  in  the  Tamanacan  language  even  the  adverbs  and  the 
other  particles  are  declined,  wherever  they  are  united  with 
possessive  nouns."  t 


NOTE  12. 


Mstraet  Terms, 


P.  15.  ^I  doubt  not  but  that  there  is  in  this  [the  Mohegan^ 
language  the  full  proportion  of  abstract  to  concrete  terms^  which  is 
commonly  to  be  found  in  other  languages*'*^ 

This  was  doubtless  the  case  also  in  the  Massachusetts  dialect, 
as  we  do  not  find  Eliot  making  any  complaint  of  the  want  of 
those  terms  (as  he  does  of  the  want  of  a  verb  substantive) 
though  he  had  constant  occasion  for  the  use  of  them  in  trans> 
lating  the  Bible.  He  also  gives  some  examples  of  them  in  his 
Grammar. 

In  the  Delaware  language,  both  Mr.  Zeisberger  and  Mr. 
Heckewelder  give  various  examples  of  abstract  terms;  and 
from  the  latter  writer  we  learn,  that  the  Delawarcs  have  a 
general  mode  of  forming  those  words,  by  means  of  the  termi- 
nation wagan  (or  woagan,  as  the  German  missionaries  sometimes 
write  it,  to  express  the  sound  of  the  English  w)  *^  which  answers 
to  that  of  russ  in  English  and  heit  or  keit  in  German."  Corres- 
pondence with  Mr.  Du  Ponceau,  p.  408.  Letter  xviii. 

They  are  also  found  in  some  (and  perhaps  will  be  in  all)  of 
the  languages  of  South  America.  Gilij,  in  speaking  of  the  nu- 
meroiis  dialects  spread  over  that  vast  extent  of  country  through 
which  the  Orinoco  flows,  observes,  that  it  has  been  made  a 


P 

w 
d; 
ej 
F> 

m 

Wi 


Eliot^s  Gram.  p.  24. 


t  Saggio,  &c.  p.  166. 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAOES. 


41 


to  the 
sign  of 

!toTSCH 

to  the 
lall  be 
of  the 
joined 
ition  of 
1  in  the 
(lost  ex* 
•atter  of 
tnd  the 
sd  with 


]Iohegan^ 
,  which  is 

dialect, 

want  of 

stantive) 

ill  trans- 

>m  in  his 

land  Mr. 
[ms ;  and 
have  a 
|he  termi- 
tmetimeg 
answers 
Corres- 

Jin  all)  of 
If  the  nu- 
through 
made  a 

IS. 


question  sometimes  by  the  missionaries,  "  whether  the  Orino- 
kcse  have  abstract  noun  substantives,  as  whiteneas,  btauty,  &c. 
The  doubt  in  this  case  has  arisen  from  the  common  practice 
with  the  Indians  of  uniting  words  with  the  pronouns ;  but  I 
know,  to  a  certainty,  (whatever  others  may  think)  that  some 
of  the  Orinokeae  have  such  nouns.  Of  this  we  have  most  mani- 
fest instances  in  the  Tnnutnacan  words  checcite  or  cheictivate, 

bigness ;    aremutunde^  whiteness,  &c and  the   following  are 

examples  of  them  in  composition :  Verdro  tenet  achere  caige  iche- 
cilli^  I  saw  a  dog,  his  bigness  like  a  tiger,  that  is,  of  the  bigness 
of  a  tiger ;  cdreta  cdige  ttaremutunii^  like  paper  his  whiteness.'* 
The  author  adds,  however,  that  the  Maipuri^  "  so  far  as  he  re- 
collects,''^ do  not  make  use  of  abstract  terms.*  In  the  languages 
on  the  zoestem  side  of  South  America,  there  appears  to  be 
no  want  of  abstract  terms.  Father  Torres  Rubio,  it  is  true,  in  his 
valuable  Grammar  of  the  Quichvan  language  (fol.  31)  first  in- 
forms his  reader  that  there  are  no  abstract  nouns  in  it ;  but 
this  expression  is  evidently  to  be  understood  in  a  qualified 
sense,  because  he  immediately  goes  on  to  inform  us,  in  the 
same  sentence,  how  such  terms  are  formed — "  they  are  formed 
(says  he)  of  the  concrete  term  and  the  infinitive  of  sum,  es,  fui, 
and,  being  so  formed,  they  are  varied  (or  declined)  by  means  of 
the  possessive  particles  thus — yurac  eaniy,  my  whiteness,"  &c. 
the  analysis  of  which  expression  (though  not  given  by  the  au- 
thor) seems  to  be  as  follows : 


Yurac 
Cani 
Y    . 


a  white  thing. 

to  be. 

my  (the  possessive  particle  of  the  first 

person  sir^lar,  always  united  with 

the  noun,)  t 


Proceeding  farther  south,  on  the  same  side  of  the  continent, 
we  find  the  wonderfully  regular  language  of  Chili  abun- 
dantly supplied  with  abstract  terms,  or,  at  least,  with  an 
extraordinary  capacity  of  forming  them  at  pleasure.  Father 
Febris,  in  his  Grammar  of  that  language,  says,  that  "  abstract 
nouns,  as  goodness,  whiteness,  &c.  are  formed  by  subjoining  the 
word  gen  (which  is  the  verb  sunt,  es,  est,)  to  adjectives  or  sub- 


*  Saggio,  ftc.  vol.  iii.  p.  170. 

1>  Arte  y  Vocabulario  de  la  Lengua  Quichua,  &c. 


42 


THE  rNDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


stantives;  as  ciimegenj  goodness;  l^^hgen^  whiteness/'  Slc* 
And  the  Abhe  Molina  affirms,  that  the  practice  of  forming  ab> 
strict  terms  is  even  carried  farther  than  in  the  European  lan- 
guages; for  (says  he)  "instead  of  saying  pu  Huinca^  the 
Sp;miards,  they  commonly  say,  Huincagen^  the  Spaniolity— 
ttmUn  cuiagtn^  your  trio,  that  is,  you  other  three — 6pu  tamen 
cayugen  layai,  two  of  you  other  six  will  die ;  literally,  two  of 
your  sixths.'*  t 


NOTE  13. 

Analogy  between  the  Mohegan  and  Hebrew  Languages^ 

P.  1 6.  "  Besides  what  has  been  observed  concerning  prefixes 
and  suffixes  [p.  12.]  there  is  a  remarkable  analogy  between  some 
words  in  the  Mohegan  language  and  the  correspondent  words  in  the 
Hebrew;'  &c. 

The  slight  resemblances  between  the  Hebrew  and  the  Indian 
languages  (of  New  England)  could  not  pass  unobserved  by  our 
ancestors,  at  a  period  when  there  were  at  least  as  many  good  He^ 
brew  scholars,  in  proportion  to  our  population,  as  we  now  have, 
and  when  the  Indian  languages  were  much  more  familiarly 
known  than  at  present.  Roger  Williams  says  on  this  point 
— "  Others  and  myselfe  have  conceived  some  of  their  words  to 
hold  affinitie  with  the  Hebrew."  But  he  afterwards  adds — 
"  Yet  againe  I  have  found  a  greater  affinity  of  their  language 
with  the  Greek  tongue."  J  Other  early  writers  also  mention 
the  subject.  The  comparison  has  been  recently  pursued  at 
considerable  length  by  the  Rev.  Dr.  Jarvis,  in  the  learned 
Notes  to  his  Discourse  on  the  Religion  of  the  Indian  Tribes  of 
Korth  .America;  in  which  the  author  concludes  his  remarks 
upon  one  of  the  dialects  (the  Cherokee)  in  these  emphatic 
terms — ^^  It  :vill  immediately  be  seen  that  a  language  so  re- 
markably  rich  in  grammatical  forms  as  to  surpass  even  the 
Greek,  differs  toto  coelo  from  the  Hebrew,  one  of  the  simplest 
of  all  languages."  || 

*  Arte  de  la  Lenffii»  General  del  Reyno  de  Chile ;  compueato  por  el 
P.  Andres  Febrh,  Misionero  de  la  Comp.  de  Jesus.     Lima,  1765. 
t  Kist.  of  Chili.    American  Iranilation. 

%  Preface  to  his  Key  into  thr  Language  ofAmtriea^  Load.  1643;  repab- 
lisbed  in  vols.  iii.  and  v.  (First  Series)  of  these  CoUectioiu. 
II  New  York  Hist.  Collect,  vok  iii.  p.  245. 


TflC  im)iAN  LANOt'AOfiS. 


43 


&c.* 
ng  ab- 
an  lan- 
;o,  the 
olity — 
1  tamen 
two  of 


'fS. 

prefixes 
een  some 
'ds  in  the 

le  Indian 
d  by  oor 
»oou  He* 
ow  have, 
amiUarly 
lis  point 
words  to 
adds — 
anguage 
mention 
irsued  at 
learned 
Tribes  of 
remarks 
mphatic 
so  re- 
even  the 
simplest 


sto  por  el 
I;  repuli- 


NOTE  14. 
OnnuJcing Indian  VoeaMarie$» 

P.  1 7.  "  It  is  to  be  wmW,  that  every  one  who  makes  a  voedbur 
lary  of  any  Indian  langw^e^  toould  be  careful  to  notice  the  prefixes 
and  suffixes  [of  nouns.]  The  like  attention  to  the  moods  and  per- 
sonal affixes  of  the  verbs  is  Mcessary,'''* 

A  similar  caution  is  necessary  throughout  these  languages ; 
the  Indians  being  more  in  the  habit  of  employing  specim:  terms 
than  Europeans  are.  *'  It  was  a  good  while  (says  Mr.  Hecke- 
welder)  before  I  found  out,  that  when  you  asked  of  an  Indian 
the  name  of  a  thing,  he  would  always  give  you  the  specific,  and 
never  the  generic  denomination......!  found  myself  under  very 

{;reat  embarrassment  in  consequence  of  it  when  I  first  began  to 
earn  the  Delaware  language.  I  would  point  to  a  tree,  and  ask 
the  Indians  how  they  called  it ;  they  would  answer,  an  oak^  an 
ash^  a  maple,  as  the  case  might  be ;  so  that  at  last  I  found  in  my 
vocabulary  more  than  a  dozen  words  for  the  word  trer^  *  ThA 
same  thing  is  observable  in  the  use  of  their  verbs.  In  the 
Cherokee  (says  the  Rev.  Mr.  Buthrick  in  his  communication 
before  cited)  "  thirteen  different  verbs  are  used,  to  express  the 
action  of  mashing,  as  follows : — 


"Ciitawo, 
Cu  le  stu  la, 
Tse  stu  la, 
CA  cu  squd, 
He  cd  squd, 
TSL  ck  su  la, 
T§  tse  ya  su  la, 
T&  CO  su  la, 
Ta  tse  yi  su  la, 
TSL  cQng  ke  II, 
T£i  tse  yilng  k$  Id, 
Ta  ca  t6  ya, 
Tse  ya  wa, 
Co  we  la. 


I  am  washing  myself,  as  in  a  river, 
my  head. 

another  person's  head, 
my  face, 
another's  face, 
my  hands, 
another's  bands, 
my  feet, 
another's  leet. 
my  clothes, 
another's  clothes, 
dishes,  &c. 
a  child, 
meat. 


u 

u 

u 

u 

(( 

it 

u 

u 

t( 

u 

n 

u 


"  This  differ^iince  of  words  prevents  the  necessity  of  mention- 
ing the  object  washed.  So  also  with  the  verbs  love,  take,  have^ 
leave,  die,  weigh,  &c."  **" 

*  CorreBpondence  with  Mr.  Du  Ponceau,  in  Hiitorickl  TYaniKctions,  toI.  i. 
p.  437.    (Letter  24.) 

7 


44 


THE  INDIAN    LANGUAGES. 


Gilij  mentions  the  same  thing  in  the  languages  of  South  Ame- 
rica. After  speaking  of  the  extraordinary  degree  to  which 
discrimination  is  carried  in  various  instances,  he  says — "  The 
same  variety  is  found  in  words  applied  to  different  objects,  but 
whce  difference  among  us  is  disregarded ;  and  these  words 
are  multiplied  in  proportion  as  the  objects  of  them  are  multi- 
plied.. To  express  I  wash  my  face,  requires  a  different  word 
from  that  which  would  express  washing  my  fett,  my  hands,  &c. 

the  old  age  of  a  man,  of  a  woman,  and  of  a  garment,  the 

heat  of  the  body,  of  a  fire,  of  the  sun  and  of  the  climate,  arc 
all  different  words."  *  Again — "  In  our  language,  and  in  many 
others,  there  is  but  one  word  (mangiare)  for  to  eat ;  but  in  the 
Tamanacan,  there  are  several,  according  to  the  thing  eaten : 
Jacuru  is  to  eat  bread,  or  the  cassava ;  jemeri,  to  eat  fruit, 
honey ;  janeri,  to  eat  meat,  &c."  t 


_  NOTE  15. 

On  the  IHalecta  mentioned  by  Dr.  Edwards  aa  being  radically  the 
same  with  the  Mohegan. 

Dr.  Edwards,  at  the  beginning  of  his  Observations,  has  given 
seventeen  different  names  of  Indian  languages,  which  w^ere  con- 
sidered to  be  so  many  kindred  dialects  of  the  Mohegan ;  namely, 
the  languages  of 

1.  The  Massachusetts  Indians ;  used  in  Eliot's  translation  of 

the  Bible ; 

2.  Delawares,  in  Pennsylvania ; 

3.  Penobscots,  bordering  on  Nova  Scotia ; 

4.  St.  Francis  Indians,  in  Canada ; 

5.  Shawanese,  on  the  Ohio ; 

6.  Chippewaus,  westward  of  Lake  Huron ; 

7.  Ottowaus ;  more  properly  called  W'tawas ; 

8.  Nanticokes ; 

9.  Munsees  (Minsi ;) 

10.  Menomonees  (Menomenes  or  FoUes  Avoines;) 

11.  Messisaugas; 

12.  Saukies  (Sauks  or  Sacs ;) 

*  Saggio,  &c.  vol.  iii.  p.  '^38.  See  also  Mr.  Heckewelder's  remarks  on 
the  words  old  and  young,  in  the  Delaware— JVofe*  on  ElioVt  Gram.  p.  xvi. 

t  Saggio,  &c.  vol.  iii.  p.  173. 


THE  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


45 


uth  Aine« 
to  which 
s— "  The 
jects,  but 
ge  words 
are  multi- 
rent  word 
ands,  &c« 
'Dient,  the 
imate,  are 
1  in  many 
but  in  the 
ng  eaten: 
I  eat  fruit, 


idicnlly  the 

,  has  given 

were  con- 

i;  namely, 

inslation  of 


remarks  oa 
xm.  p«  zvi. 


13.  Ottagaumies  (Foxes  or  Renards;) 

1 4.  Killistenoes  (Rnisteneaux ;) 

1 5.  Nipegone ; 

16.  Algonkins; 

17.  Wmncbagoes. 

A  very  small  part  Ot'  this  list  is  given  by  Dr.  Edwards  upon  his 
own  authority;  and  we  now  nnd.  by  a  more  extensive  ac- 
quaintance with  the  Indian  languages  than  was  attainable  when 
he  wrote,  that  the  list  needs  some  corrections.  This  will  be 
seen  in  the  course  of  the  following  remarks ;  which  the  Editor 
has  subjoined,  for  the  sake  of  presenting  to  the  student  a  more 
clear  and  distinct  view  of  the  different  languages  contained  in 
the  annexed  Con^raiive  Vocahularif^  as  well  as  of  the  geogra- 
phical situation  of  the  Indian  nations  that  speak  them.  The 
specimens  themselves  are  given  upon  the  authorities  mentioned 
under  each  dialect;  and  some  of  them  have  never  before  been 
published. 

To  the  several  dialects  of  the  Delaware  stock,  which  are  enu- 
merated by  Dr.  Edwards  under  the  general  name  of  Mohegan^ 
the  Editor  has  added  corresponding  specimens  of  two  others ; 
namely,  the  Narre^anset^  collected  From  Roger  Williams'  "  Key 
into  the  Language  of  America,"  and  the  Mnaki^  from  Father 
RdWs  MS.  Dictionary,  belonging  to  the  library  of  the  Univer- 
sity in  Cambridge.  * 

The  true  name  of  the  Mohcgan  Indians,  as  we  are  inform- 
ed by  Mr.  Heckewelder,  is  Mahicanni ;  which,  (according 
to  the  German  pronunciation)  is  very  nearly  represented  by 

*  Of  this  valuable  MS.  the  Editor  has  given  a  brief  account,  in  the  JVfe- 
moirt  of  the  ^nutriean  Academy^  vol.  iv.  p.  358.  The  work  itself  has  lately 
attracted  the  notice  of  eminent  foreign  scholars,  who  take  the  liveliest  inter ' 
est  in  the  expected  publication  of  it.  In  the  Jillgetneine  Literatur-Zeilung, 
or  Oeneral  rAterary  Intelligencer,  published  at  Halle  in  Germany  (in  which 
it  is  understood  that  Professor  Vater  is  a  writer)  particular  mention  has  been 
lately  made  of  it,  and  its  publication  warmly  approved  of.  That  distin- 
guished scholar,  Baron  William  von  Humboldt,  also  expresses  himself  in  the 
following  strong  terms  in  a  late  letter  upon  this  subject :  ^*  The  publication 
of  the  Dictionary  of  Father  Rdle  will  be  of  still  more  importance  p.  e.  than 
the  Cotton  MS.]  and  1  cannot  but  solicit  you,  as  earnestly  as  possible,  to  do 
every  thing  which  may  depend  upon  you  personally  to  effect  it.  For,  as  far 
as  I  recollect,  but  little  is  known  of  the  Abnaki  dialect ;  and  this  work  would 
both  enrich  our  present  stock  with  one  language  more,  and  would  preserve 
the  language  in  question  from  that  perpetual  oblivion,  to  which,  without  the 
puMication  of  this  work,  it  4s  probably  destined. ''  Sucli  decided  opinions, 
coming  from  so  high  autiiority,  it  is  to  be  hoped,  will  not  be  disregardt-ri 
by  those  who  are  ambitious  of  maintaining  the  literary  character  of  onr 
country. 


4# 


THC  INDIAN  LANGUAGSfl.. 


Dr.  Edwards'  English  name,  Muhhekanteto,  Mr.  ll«ckewclder 
observes,  that  the  Dutch  call  them  Mahikandtrn  j  the  French, 
Mourigans  and  Mahingans ;  the  English,  Mohicconf^  Mithuccans, 
Muhhekanem^  Schaticooks,  River-Jndtans*  *  Dr.  Edwards  in- 
forms us,  that  the  particular  dialect  treated  of  in  his  work,  is 
that  of  the  tribe,  wnich  is  familiarly  known  here  by  the  name 
of  the  Stockbridge  Indians,  who  take  this  English  name  from 
that  of  the  town,  which  was  for  some  ti|ne  their  principal  resi^ 
dcnce.  The  Indian  name  of  the  territory,  which  now  contains 
Stockbridge,  Sheffield,  and  some  other  towns  in  the  south-west* 
eriy  coener  of  Massachusetts,  was  Iloutatunnuckf  more  com* 
monly  written  Housatonic,  and  sometimes  Ousatannock ;  a  namo 
by  wnich  the  well-known  river  in  that  auarter  is  it\\\  called. 
These  Indians,  after  living  in  dispersea  situations  about  the 
Housatonic,  were  collected  together  in  the  year  1736,  at  Stock- 
bridge,  under  the  care  of  the  Rev.  John  Sergeant,  their  former 
laborious  and  faithful  tsissionary.  t  Afterwards  they  removed 
to  Oneida  county,  near  Lake  Ontario,  in  the  state  of  New 
York,  I  where  they  still  reside,  under  the  care  of  their  worthy 
missionary,  the  present  Mr.  Sergeant.  The  place  where  they 
reside  has  been  named  J^em  Stockbridge,  in  the  year  1 79$ 
their  number  was  about  three  hundred.]}  They  are  destined, 
it  seems,  to  a  further  removal ;  for  Mr.  Serjeant  has  informed 
the  Editor  (in  a  late  letter)  that  "  the  Sto<:^bridge  tribe,  with 
the  Six  Nations,  have  obtained  a  fine  country  in  the  vicinity  of 
Green  Bay ;  and  eventually  they  will  emigrate  thither  in  the 
course  of  a  few  years.  They  will  visit  that  country  this  sum* 
mer;  perhaps  a  few  families  will  remove.'' 

The  Mohegans,  it  appears  by  a  work  already  cited,  have 
long  recognized  the  Shawanese  as  their  *' younger  brother  ;"§ 
which  accords  with  what  Mr.  Heckewelder  states  on  this 
point,  as  will  be  seen  hereafter. 

For  further  information  respecting  the  tribes  of  the  Mohegan 
nation,  the  reader  is  referred  to  the  valuable  Memoir  of  the 
Rev.  Dr.  Holmes.l    The  Editor  will  now  proceed  to  the  other 


*  Hhtorical  Account  and  Introduction,  p.  2€. 

t  Historical  Memoirs  relatine  to  the  Housatunnuk  Indians ;   by  the  Rer. 
Samuel  Hopkins,  (Boston,  1753^  pp.  43,  50. 

j:  Histor.  Collect,  vol.  t.  p.  195,  note. 

II  Ibid.  vol.  iv.  p.  67. 

i  Hopkins*  Histor.  Mem.  of  the  Housatunnuk  Indians,  p.  90. 

T  Histor.  Collect,  vol.  ix.  p.  75. 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAOES. 


47 


have 
|er;"§ 
this 


Tier. 


nations  mentioned  by  Dr.  Edwards ;  noticing  them  in  the  order 
in  which  they  occur  in  his  work. 

I.  The  Jilas$achuntta  Indians.  The  name  of  this  nation  is 
familiar  to  ctvery  American  reader.  Goo^'n,  who  wrote  in 
1674,  says  that  'hcse  Indi&ns  '^  inhabited  principally  about  that 
place  in  Masc  .^usetts  Bay  where  the-  English  now  dwell. 
These  were  a  numerous  and  ereat  people.  Their  chief  sachem 
held  dominion  over  many  other  petty  govemours."  *  Of  their 
language  we  have  an  invaluable  treasure  in  ElioCa  Orammar 
and  his  Trnrulatiom  of  the  Scriptures  and  of  various  Religious 
Tracts,  which  were  enumerated  in  a  former  volume  of  these 
Collections,  t  It  may  be  here  remarked,  that  this  language 
has  often  been  called  the  Xatick ;  apparently  from  the  acci- 
dental circumstance,  that  Eliot  established  his  first  Indian 
church  in  the  to\  n  of  that  name  which  is  near  Boston,  and 
which  was  once  the  town  of  greatest  note  among  the  Indians 
in  this  quarter.  But  Eliot  himself  calls  it  the  Masaachusetts 
language. 

3.  Delawarea.  Of  this  people  we  have  recently  had 
the  most  ample  information  in  the  interesting  work  of  the  Rev. 
Mr.  Heckewelder.  According  to  the  tradition  handed  down 
to  them  by  their  ancestors,  this  nation  resided,  many  hundred 
years  ago,  in  a  very  distant  country  in  the  weatem  part  of  the 
American  continent.  They  determined  on  migrating  eastward, 
and  accordingly  set  out  together  in  a  body,  and  after  various 
adventures  tind  conflicts  with  other  nations,  a  part  of  them 
crossed  the  Missisippi,  and  about  one  half  of  the  nation  settled 
on  the  shores  of  the  Atlantic.  This  portion  was  divided  into 
three  tribes,  two  of  which  were  disttn^ished  by  the  names  of 
the  Turtle  and  the  Turkey^  the  former  calling  themselves  in 
their  own  language  UnAmis^  and  the  other  Unaiachtgo ;  their 
settlements  extenaed  from  the  Mohicannittuck  (River  of  the 
Mohicans,  which  we  call  the  North,  or  Hudson^s  River)  to  be- 
yond the  Potomack.  The  third  tribe,  the  IVolf,  commonly 
called  the  Minai,  which  we  have  corrupted  into  Monaeya  or 
Munaeea^  chose  to  live  back  of  the  other  two.  The  proper  na- 
tional name  of  the  Delawares  is  Lmni  Ltntgpe,  which  signifies 
^  Original  People,"  a  race  of  human  beings  who  arc  the  same 

*  Historical  CoUectionr,  vol.  i.  p.  148. 

''  Vol.  ix.  (Second  Series)  p.  24t.  To  the  list  there  given,  should  be  add- 
ed the  following — Shepherd^*  Hineere  Convert  and  Sound  Believer.  Eliot,  in 
a  letter  to  Sir  Robert  Boyle,  d'ited  July  7,  1688,  mentions  this  tract  as  one 
which  he  had  ^^  translated  into  the  Indian  Languag^e  many  years  since/'  See 
Histor.  Coll.  vol.  iii.  p.  187. 


% 


48 


THE  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


that  they  were  in  the  beginning,  unchanged  and  unmixed.  They 
are  known  and  called,  by  all  the  western,  northern,  and  Bome 
of  the  southern  nations,  by  the  name  of  fVapanachki^  which  the 
Europeans  have  corrupted  into  ^penaki,  Openagi,  Menaquis  and 
Ahenakis.  *  All  these  names,  as  Mr.  Heckewelder  informs  us, 
however  differently  written  and  improperly  understood  by  au- 
thors, point  to  one  and  the  same  people,  the  Lenape^  whd  are 
by  this  compound  word  called  "  People  at  the  rising  of  the  sun," 
or,  as  we  should  say,  Eastlanders ;  and  this  people  is  acknow- 
ledged by  near  forty  Indian  tribes  (whom  we  call  nations)  as 
being  their  "  grandfathers."  For  further  particulars  of  their 
history,  as  well  as  of  their  language,  the  reader  is  referred  to 
Mr.  Heckewclder's  work. 

Mr.  Heckewelder  says,  it  is  not  in  his  power  to  ascertain  the 
whole  number  of  the  Delawares  at  the  present  day.  They  arc 
very  much  scattered ;  a  number  of  them,  chiefly  of  the  Monsey 
tribe,  living  in  Upper  Canada,  others  are  in  the  state  of  Ohio, 
and  some  on  the  waters  of  the  Wabash  in  the  Indiana  Terri- 
tory. A  considerable  number  of  them  has  crossed  the  Missi- 
sippi.  t  In  a  late  Account  of  the  Indian  Tribe»  of  Ohio^  by  John 
Johnston,  Esq.  Indian  Agent  of  the  United  States,  it  is  said  that 
this  nation  is  now  reduced  to  a  very  small  number ;  and  that 
the  greater  part  of  them  reside  on  White  River,  in  Indiana.  A 
small  number,  it  appears,  resides  on  Sandusky  River.  | 

In  connexion  witn  the  tradition,  that  the  Delawares  emigrat- 
ed from  "  the  western"  part  of  this  continent,  it  may  not  be  un- 
deserving of  notice,  that  a  dialect  of  their  language  is  extensive- 
ly spoken  in  a  very  distant  western  region  of  the  continent  at 
the  present  time,  by  the  Crees  or  Knisteneaux,  as  was  observed 
in  the  introduction  to  these  Notes.  The  specimen  of  Delaware 
in  the  following  Vocabulary  was  obligingly  furnished  by  Mr. 
Heckewelder. 

3.  Penchscots,  This  is  the  well  known  tribe,  of  which  a 
remnant  still  resides  in  the  state  of  Maine.  The  fullest  vocab- 
ulary of  their  language,  within  the  Editor's  knowledge,  is  a 
small  Manuscript  of  the  French  Mistionaries,  who  have  occa- 
sionally resided  with  this  tribe ;    from  which  collection  the 


*  Heckewelder^s  Account,  chap.  i.  and  Introduction,  p.  29.  It  may  be 
here  remarked,  that  the  name  of  the  Menakis  is  written,  bj  Father  Rftle,  at 
well  as  by  some  of  the  later  French  missionaries,  in  three  syllables — Mnakis^ 
or  Jibnaquit, 


t  Ilistor.  Account,  p.  68. 

\  See  Archsologia  Amer.  vol.  i.  pp.  270,  271. 


THE  INDIAN   LANGUAGES. 


49 


[.  They 
nd  Bome 
hich  the 
iqiiia  and 
forms  us, 
d  by  au- 
who  are 
the  sun," 
acknow- 
itions)  as 
of  their 
fcrred  to 

;rtain  the 

They  are 

;  Monscy 

of  Ohio, 

ma  Terri- 

ihe  Missi- 

,  by  John 

said  that 

and  that 

liana.    A 

't 

i  emigrat- 

lot  be  un- 

extensive- 

ntinent  at 

observed 

)elaware 

by  Mr. 

which  a 
jst  vocab- 
edge,  is  a 
lave  occa- 
ction  the 


It  may  be 
her  R&Ie,  at 
s — Abnakis^ 


words  in  the  annexed  Vocabulary  have  been  extracted.  For 
the  perusal  of  this  MS.  the  Editor  is  indebted  to  the  Right 
Reverend  Bishop  Chevertu  of  Boston ;  who  has  also  obligingly 
given  his  permission,  that  the  Historical  Society  may  make 
such  further  use  of  it  as  they  shall  think  proper. 

4.  St.  Francii  Indians.  These  are  a  Canadian  tribe.  The 
latest  account  we  have  of  the  remnant  of  them,  which  still  re> 
sides  in  Canada,  is  in  the  '^  Report  of  the  Select  Committee  of 
the  Society  for  propagatine  the  Gospel  among  the  Indians  and 
others  in  North  America,"  dated  the  29th  of  October,  1821. 
They  are  there  described  as  *'  the  Abauauuis,  or  St.  Francis 
Indians,  near  the  mouth  of  the  St.  Francis  River,  consisting  of 
65  families  and  360  souls."  Their  Chief  had  his  education,  in 
part,  ut  Dartmouth  College  in  New  Hampshire.  Two  females 
of  this  tribe  came  from  Canada  to  Boston  in  July,  1821,  and 
were  placed  by  the  Society  above-mentioned  under  the  care  of 
the.  Rev.  Thomas  J^oyts  of  Ncedham  near  Boston.  *  From  that 
gentleman,  and  from  the  Rev.  Dr.  Holmes,  Secretary  of  the 
Society,  the  Editor  has  obtained  several  words  of  their  dialect, 
from  which  he  has  selected  those  contained  in  the  following 
Vocabulary.  The  words,  as  might  be  expected,  will  be  found 
to  correspond  with  the  Abnaki  from  Father  Rule. 

5.  Shawanese^  An  account  of  this  nation  will  be  found  in 
Mr.  Heckewelder's  work.  We  are  there  informed,  that  Gene- 
ral Gibson  (who  had  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  Indians,  and 
spoke  several  of  their  languages)  thought  their  true  name  was 
Satoano ;  and  that  they  are  so  called  by  the  other  Indian  na- 
tions, from  being  a  southern  people.  "  Shatoaneu  (says  Mr.  H.) 
in  the  Lenape  language  means  the  south ;  shatoanachau^  the 
south  wind."  t  They  formerly  inhabited  the  southern  country. 
Savannah  in  Georgia,  ar.d  the  Floridas,  but  were  compelleB  by 
the  neighbouring  nations  to  leave  that  territory ;  when  they 
settled  on  the  Oii*o.  They  call  the  Mahicanni  their  "  elder 
brother,"  and  the  Delawares  their  "grandfather."    Of  that 

f>ortion  which  remains  in  the  state  of  Ohio,  we  have  a  partica- 
ar  account,  drawn  up  by  Mr.  Johnston,  in  the  first  volume  of 
the  Archaologia  Americana,  before  cited.  That  writer  states, 
that  the  Shawanese  have  a  traditior,  that  their  ancestors  cross- 
ed the  sea;  though  the  Indians  in  general  believe,  that  they 
were  created  on  thb  continent.    He  adds,  however,  that  it  is 


*  See  the  Report,  pp.  41,  42;    annexed  to  the  Rev.  Mr.  Tuckerman^s 
Discourse  preached  before  the  Society  in  1821. 

t  Hbtorical  Account,  &c,  pp.  29,  69. 


THE  INDIAN   LANGUAGES. 


•omewhat  doubtful,  whether  the  yearly  sacrifice,  which  they 
make  for  their  safe  arrival  in  this  country,  has  any  other  refe- 
rence than  to  their  crossing  some  great  river  or  arm  of  the  sea.* 
A  short  vocabulary  of  their  language  is  eiven  by  the  same 
writer,  from  whom  one  of  the  specimens  in  the  following  Vo- 
cabulary is  taken ;  the  other  is  from  Dr.  Edwards.  "  Their 
language,*'  according  to  Mr.  Hcckewcldcr,  -^  is  more  easily 
learned  than  that  of  the  Lenape,  and  has  a  great  aflinity  to  thd 
Mohican,  Chippeway  and  other  kindred  languages.  They 
generallr  place  the  accent  on  the  last  syllable.'*  t 

6.  Chippewttys  or  Chipptvoaus,  Dr.  Edwards  speaks  of  this 
nation  as  Dcing  "^  at  the  westward  of  Lake  Huron.''  They  arc 
dispersed  in  various  other  territories.  Loskiel  describes  them 
as  *'  a  numerous  nation,  inhabiting  the  north  coast  of  Lake 
Erie."  He  states  their  number  to  be  (at  the  time  he  wrote) 
about  fifteen  thousand.  |  Mr.  Schermerhom,  in  his  Report  to 
the  Society  for  propa^atmg  tht  Gospel^  describes  them,  under  the 
names  of  **  Algonqums  or  Chippeways,"  as  follows :  ''  We  now 
find  them  extending  between  the  Straits  of  Detroit  and  Michi* 
gan  Lake ;  on  the  south  borders  of  Lake  Superior ;  the  heads 
of  the  Missisippi,  Red  River  and  Lake  Winipie ;  up  the  Dau- 
phine  River  and  Sashashawin  to  Fort  George ;  from  thence 
with  the  course  of  Beaver  I^iver  to  Elk  River,  and  with  it  to 
its  discharge  into  the  Lake  of  the  Hills  ;  from  this,  east  to  the 
isle  a  la  Crosse  and  by  the  Missisippi  to  Churchill."  ||  Proba- 
bly several  other  tribes  have  been  erroneously  included  with 
them  by  travellers,  in  consequence  of  the  Chippeway  dialect 
being  a  common  language  of  intercourse  among  the  northern 
Indians ;  aj^'eeably  to  the  observation  of  Prof.  Yater  respect- 
ing the  Wmnebago  dialect,  as  will  be  seen  in  a  subsequent 
part*of  these  Notes.  Specimens  of  the  Chippeway  language 
are  given  by  Carver  ana  Long,  from  whose  travels  the  words 
in  the  annexed  Vocabulary  have  been  selected. 

7.  Ottotoaus,  The  Ottowas,  Outawas,  or  more  properly 
W^tawas  (with  the  whistled  fV,  as  Mr.  Heckewelder  obseryes) 
are  a  Canadian  tribe.  *'  They  reside  (aecordine  to  Pike)  on 
the  north-west  side  of  Lake  Michiean  and  Lake  Huron,  and 
hunt  between  those  lakes  and  Lake  Superior."  §    Mr.  Du  Pon- 


*  Afehaolng.  Amer.  vol.  i.  pp.  273,  276. 

t  HiikmcAl  Account,  p.  73. 

X  LodtiePs  Hiat.  of  the  Miaiion  of  the  United  Brethroi.    Lend.  17M. 

II  See  Hist.  Coll.  Second  Series,  vol.  ii.  p.  10. 

»  Pikers  Jounul,  Appendix  to  Part  First,  p.  63. 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAOEfl. 


01 


ceau  informs  the  Editor,  that  he  knows  of  no  vocabulary  of 
their  lancua^e  extant. 

8.  J'lanttcoktt.  These  were  a  body  of  the  Lenape  (or  De- 
lawares)  who,  in  the  ancient  emigration  of  that  people  from  the 
interior  towards  the  sea  coast,  proceeded,  togipthcr  with  their 
offspring,  to  the  south,  in  Maryland  and  Virginia.*  Mr.  Ou 
Ponceau  states,  that  the  specimen  in  the  following  Vocabulary 
is  all  that  he  has  been  able  to  obtain  of  their  language,  rie 
adds,  also,  in  respect  to  that  specimen — ^^  The  Nanticoke  words 
are  some  of  them  double,  being  taken  from  difierenl  vocabula- 
ries ;  one  by  General  Murray,  the  other  by  Mr.  Hcckewelder. 
I  prefer  the  latter."  The  name  of  this  nation,  according  to 
Mr.  Heckewelder,  is  properly  "  M'enticoy  or,  after  the  English 
pronunciation,  .Yan/rco."  t 

9.  Muntf.tt,  or  Minsu  These  were  a  part  of  the  Dela wares, 
the  Wolf  tribe.  Mr.  Heckewelder  describes  them  as  the  third 
of  the  srcat  tribes,  into  which  the  Delawares  upon  the  Atlantic 
coast  divided  themselves  at  the  period  of  the  emigration  above- 
mentioned.  He  adds,  that  they  are  commonly  called  Minaiy 
which  we  have  corrupted  into  Monsey.  *'  They  extended  their 
settlements  from  the  Mintaink^  (a  place  named  after  them,) 
where  they  had  their  council  seat  and  fire,  quite  up  to  the 
Hudson  on  the  east ;  and  to  the  west  or  south-west  far  beyond 
the  Susquehannah ;  their  northern  boundaries  were  supposed 
originally  to  be  the  heads  of  the  great  rivers  Susquehannah 
and  Delaware ;  and  their  southern  boundaries,  that  ridge  of 
hills  known  in  New  Jersey  by  the  name  of  Mtukanecun,,  and  in 
Pennsylvania,  by  those  otLehigh^  Coghnewago,  &c.  Within  this 
boundary  were  their  principal  settlements ;  and,  even  as  late  as 
the  year  1743,  they  had  a  town,  with  a  large  peach  orchard, 
on  the  ti<iu:t  of  land  where  Nazareth,  in  Pennsylvania,  has  since 
been  buili;  another,  on  Lehieh  (the  west  branch  of  the  Dela- 
ware) and  others  beyond  the  Blue  Ridge ;  besides  small  family 
stcttiwMents  here  and  there  scattered.'^! 

Mr.  Du  Ponceau  remarks,  that  ^^  the  few  variations  of  their 
^tect  from  the  Delaware,  or  Unami,  do  not  entitle  it  to  the 
name  of  a  language."  The  words  in  the  annexed  Vocabulary 
are  from  Barton's  .Yew  Views. 


194, 


*  See  Heckewelder's  Account,  in  the  Treniactioaa  of  th«  Histor.  and 
Lit.  Conmittee,  &c.  p.  36. 

t  Ibid.  p.  26. 

%  Heckewelder^!  Account,  Sic.  p.  34. 

8 


A2 


rm  INDIAN  IWSI^QVA<H;e. 


10.  J^enornonees,  or  Mt^Mrntnes*  "  The  Jlfenomenej,  or  ^ok 
Avoids,  as  termed  by  the  French  (says  Pike)  reside  in  seven 
villages,  situated  as  follows,  viz. — 1.  at  the  River  Menomene, 
fifteen  leagues  from  Green  Bay,  north  side  of  the  lake ;  3.  s^t 
Green  Bay ;  S.  at  Little  Kakalin ;  4.  Portage  of  Kakalin ; 
S.  Stinking  Lake ;   6.  entrance  of  a  small  lake  on  Fox  River ; 

and  7th,  behind  the  Bank  of  the  Dead The  language  which 

they  speak  is  singular ;  for  no  white  man  has  ever  yet  been  knoton 
to  acquire  it ;  but  this  may  probably  be  attributed  to  their  all 
understanding  the  Algonquin,  in  which  they  and  the  Winneba- 
goes  transact  all  conferences  with  the  whites  or  other  nations ; 
and  the  facility  with  which  that  language  is  acquired,  is  a  fur* 
ther  reason  for  its  prevalence."  * 

11.  "The  Messisaugers,  or  Messasagues  (says  Barton)  are 
a  most  dirty  race  of  Indians,  residing  about  Lakes  Huron  and 
Superior."  t  The  few  words,  which  we  have  of  their  language, 
are  to  be  found  in  Barton's  work ;  from  which  the  specimen  in 
the  following  Vocabulary  has  been  extracted. 

12.  Saukies^  or  Sauks.  "  The  first  nation  of  Indians  (say* 
Pike)  whom  we  met  with  in  ascending  the  Missisippi  from  Su 
Louis,  were  the  Sauks,  who  principally  reside  in  four  villages. 
The  first,  at  the  head  of  the  Rapids  de  Moyen,  on  the  west 
shore, consisting  of  thirteen  log  lodges;-  the  second,  on  a  prairie 
on  the  east  shore,  about  sixty  miles  above ;  the  third,  on  the 
Riviere  de  Roche,  about  three  miles  from  the  entrance;  and 
the  last,  on  the  River  Iowa.  They  hunt  on  the  Missisippi  and 
its  confluent  streams,  from  the  Illinois  to  the  River  Des  Iowa, 
and  on  the  plains  west  of  them,  which  border  on  the  Missouri. 
They  are  so  perfectly  consolidated  with  the  Reynards,  that 
they  scarcely  can  be  termed  a  distinct  nation."  |  In  respect  to 
the  language  of  the  Saukies  (or  Sacs,  as  they  are  called  by  the 
French)  Mr.  Du  Ponceau  says — "  There  is  no  vocabulary  ex- 
tant, that  I  know  of." 

13.  Ottagaumies ;  called  by  us  tjie  Foxes,  and  by  the 
French,  Renards.  "  They  resi(!e  (according  to  Pike)  in  three 
villages — 1.  on  the  west  side  of  the  Missisippi,  six  miles  {><bove 
the  rapids  of  the  River  De  Roche ;  2.  about  twelve  miles  in  the 
rear  of  the  lead  mines ;  and  3.  on  Turkey  River,  half  a  league 
from  its  entrance.    They  are  engaged  in  the  same  wars  and 

'   •  Pike^  Journal,  Appendix  to  Part  First,  p.  58. 
t  Barton's  New  Views,  p.  xxxiii. 
%  Pike's  Journal,  Appendix  to  Part  First,  p.  66. 


THE  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


53 


that 


Iby  the 
In  three 

above 
:s  in  the 

league 
irs  and 


have  the  same  alliances  as  the  Sauks,  with  whom  they  must  be 
considered  as  indissoluble  in  war  or  peace/'*  In  rvsprct  to 
their  lanffuage^  Pike  says  they  speak  the  "  Sauk,  with  a  small 
difference  in  the  idiom."  t  Lewis  says,  that  the  Sauks  and 
Foxes  "  speak  the  same  language."  X 

14.  Knisteneaux,  or  Killiattnoes.  *' These  people  (says 
McKenzie)  are  spread  over  a  vast  extent  of  country.  Their 
language  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  people  who  inhabit  the  coast 
of  British  America  on  the  Atlantic,  with  the  exception  of  the- 
Esquimaux,  and  continues  along  the  coast  of  Labrador  and  the 
Gulf  and  banks  of  St.  Lawrence  to  Montreal.  The  line  then 
follows  the  Utawas  River  to  its  source ;  and  continues  from 
thence  nearly  west  along  the  high  lands  which  divide  the 
waters  that  fall  into  Lake  Superior  and  Hudson's  Bay.  It  then 
proceeds  till  it  strikes  the  middle  part  of  the  River  Winipic  to 
the  discharge  of  the  Saskatchiwine  into  it ;  from  thence  it  ac- 
companies the  latter  to  Fort  George,  when  the  line,  striking  by 
the  head  of  Beaver  River  to  the  Elk  River,  runs  along  itit  banks 
to  its  discharge  in  the  Lake  of  the  Hills;  from  which  it  may 
be  carried  back  east,  to  th6  Isle  d,  Id  Crosse^  and  so  on  to . 
Churchill  by  the  Missisippi.  The  whole  of  the  tract  between 
this  line  and  Hudson's  Bay  and  Straits  (except  that  of  the  Es? 
quimaux  in  the  latter)  may  be  said  to  be  exclusively  the  coun- 
try  of  the  Knisteneatix." ||  Mr.  Harrrnn^  who  has  given  the. 
latest  account  of  these  Indians,  with  a  copious  vocabulary  of 
their  language,  in  his  valuable  Journal^  says,  the  Cree  or  Knis-, 
teneaux  language  is  spoken  "  by  at  least  three  fourths  of  the 
Indians  of  the  north-west  country  on  the  east  side  of  the  Rocky 
Mountains."  §  The  Editor  has,  in  the  following  Vocabulary, 
given  a  specimen  of  their  language  both  from  McKenzie 
and  Harmon, 

15.  Jiipegons,     This  nation  will  be  presently  noticed,  under 
the  name  of  the  Winnebagoes,    See  Sect.  17. 

16.  Algonkins,    These  Indians  (says  Pike)  "reside on  the 
Lake  of  the  Two  Mountains,  and  are  dispersed  along  the  north 


*  Pikers  Journal,  Appendix  to  Part  First,  p.  57. 

t  See  his  Abstract  of  the  number,  be.  of  the  Indians  on  the  Missisippi,  be. 

X  Statistical  View  of  the  Indian  Nations,  bo.  published  by  Congress  in  the 
State  Papers  of  1806. 

II  McKenzie^s  Voyages,  p.  82.    3d  Amer.  edit. 

f  Harmon^s  Journal,  published  at  Ahdover,  Massachusetts,  1820.  ''" 


54 


THE  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


sides  of  Lakes  Ontario  and  Erie.  From  this  tribe  the  language 
of  the  Chippewajs  derives  its  name,  and  the  whole  nation  is 
frequently  designated  by  that  appellation.  The  Algonkin  lan- 
guage is  one  of  the  most  copious  and  sonorous  languages  of  all 
the  savage  dialects  in  North  America ;  and  is  spoken  and  un- 
derstoocT  by  the  various  nations  (except  the  Sioux)  from  the 
Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  to  Lake  Winipic."*  The  specimen  in 
the  following  Vocabulary  is  from  £0  Hontan ;  upon  whose  au- 
thority, however,  we  cannot  place  entire  reliance,  if  we  may 
believe  Charlevoix ;  who  asserts  that  Sagard,  Cartier  and  La 
Hontan  *'  took  at  random  a  few  words,  some  from  the  Huron 
and  others  from  the  Algonkin  tongues,  which  they  very  ill  re- 
membered, and  which  often  signified  something  very  different 
from  what  they  imagined."  t 

17.  Winnebagoes,  or  J^ipcgons,  Dr.  Edwards  gives  these  as 
the  names  of  two  different  nations,  speaking  dialects  of  the  De- 
laware stock ;  an  error,  into  which  he  was  probably  led  by  the 
extremely  irregular  orthography,  under  which  Indian  names 
are  so  frequently  disguised.  But  It  now  appears,  that  these 
are  only  two  different  names  for  the  same  nation,  or  rather  two 
modes  of  writing  the  same  name.  "  The  Nipegons  or  Winne- 
bagoes  (accordmg  to  Professor  Say,  who  accompanied  Major 
Long  in  his  Expedition)  are  the  same  people ;  and  the  French 
call  them  Puants,  They  speak  a  dialect  of  the  Naudowessie,  * 
not  at  all  akin  to  the  Delaware  or  Mohegan."  %  The  Naudo- 
wessie  (or  Sioux)  is  one  of  the  two  great  families  denominated 
by  Mr.  Du  Ponceau  the  UltrorMissisippian  Languages;  the 
Pawnee  being  the  other. 

This  error  of  Dr.  Edwards  respecting  the  language  of  the 
Winnebagoes  did  not  escape  the  notice  of  the  learned  Vater ; 
as  will  appear  by  the  following  remarks  of  his,  to  which  the 
Editor  has  been  referred  by  Mr.  Du  Ponceau : 

"  Since  1  wrote  my  last  letter  to  you  (says  he)  1  have  looked 
into  the  Mithridates  on  the  subject  of  the  Winnebagoes  or  Pu- 
ants. We  ought  always  to  look  into  that  admirable  book  be- 
fore we  sit  down  to  write,  or  even  to  think,  on  any  Indian  lan- 
guage.    I  find  Professor  Vater  fully  agrees  with  me  as  to  the 


*  Pike's  Journal,  Appendix  to  Part  First,  pp.  63,  66. 

t  Charlevoix^s  Account,  Sic,  vol.  i.  p.  300,  English  edit.  1761.     See  also 
Mr.  Du  Ponceau's  Report,  p.  xxxiv. 

X  Letter  from  Mr.  Du  Ponceau  to  the  Editor.    A  specimen  of  their  lan- 
guage, furnished  by  Professor  Say,  will  be  found  in  the  following  Vocabulary. 


II ',1 


THE  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


50 


ition  is 
:in  lan- 
5  of  all 
md  un- 
om  the 
imen  in 
ose  au- 
le  may 
and  La 
Huron 
y  ill  re- 
Jifferent 

these  as 
the  De- 
1  by  the 
1  names 
at  these 
iher  two 
p  Winne- 
;d  Major 
I  French 
lowessie,  * 
Naudo- 
minated 
res ;    the 

re  of  the 

Vater ; 

Ihich  the 

|e  looked 
;8  or  Pu- 
)Ook  be> 
lian  lan- 
is  to  the 


See  also 


their  lan- 
Dcabttlary. 


origin  and  affinity  of  this  nation,  and  gives  good  authority  for 
it : — '  By  putting  together  (says  he)  the  latest  accounts  derived 
from  authentick  sources,  it  is  possible  to  connect  with  the  Osage 
nation  (already  important  of  itself)  kindred  tribes  of  more 
distant  as  well  as  of  neighbouring  territories ;  and  in  this  case 
also  to  discover  again  a  widely  extended  race  of  American  In- 
dians, which,  through  the  Winnebagoes  or  Puants  of  the  terri- 
tories  hitherto  considered,  and  through  the  Ottos,  passing  over 
the  Pawnees,  reaches  to  the  north-eastern  frontier  of  New  Mex- 
ico. That  these  Winnebagoes  speak  the  same  language  with 
the  Ottos,  Pike  expressly  assures  us,  (Pike's  Journal,  pp.  172, 
174)*  and  therefore  we  must  expect  to  find  a  nearer  affinity 
between   these  two  nations,  through  the  neighbouring  tribes, 

than  through  the  Osages The  Sacs  and  Ottogamis  are  closely 

allied  together....and  speak  the  same  language;  so  that  the 
latest  observers  of  those  countries  agree  in  this,  that  they  are 
in  fact  to  he  considered  as  one  nation.  The  Sacs  pass  for  the 
elder  branch  of  the  two  allied  nations.  {Vergennes^  Memoire 
aur  la  Lmiisiane^  p.  90.)  According  to  Carver,  they  both 
speak  the  Chippeway ;  but  he  expressly  adds,  that  he  does  not 
know  whether  they  have  merely  adopted  it.  Edwards  reckons 
both  these  nations  among  those  that  speak  the  Mohegan ;  (Ob- 
servations on  the  Language  of  the  Muhhekaneew  Indians ;)  but, 
as  he  also  includes  the  Winnebagoes,  he  has  clearly  asserted  too 

much According  to  the  information  of  Lewis  and  Clarke, 

these  two  nations  (Sacs  and  Ottogamies)  speak  a  language 
different  from  others ;  with  which  of  the  neighbouring  idioms 
it  has  most  affinity  is  yet  to  be  discovered.' — Mithridates^  vol. 
iii.  part  3,  pp.  267,  370.  You  will  wonder  with  me  (con- 
tinues Mr.  Du  Ponceau)  at  the  astonishing  penetration  of  the 
freat  Vater,  in  discovering,  without  a  vocabulary^  the  error  of 
Idwards,  (in  classing  the  Winnebago  with  the  Delaware  dia- 
lects,) and  accounting  for  it  in  the  very  natural  way,  that  they 
speak  the  Chippeway  as  a  trading  language.  1  must  repeat, 
that  those  who  make  researches  into  the  Indian  languages  with- 
out first  studying  the  Mithridates,  will  often  find  their  discoveries 
forestalled  in  it." 

The  Winnebagoes  or  Puants  (says  Pike)  "  reside  on  the  Ri- 
vers Ouisconsing,  De  Roche,  and  Green  Bay,  in  seven  villages, 
which  are  situated  as  follows,  viz. — 1.  at  the  entrance  of  Green 
Bay ;    3.  end  of  ditto ;    3.  Wuckan,  on  the  Fox  River ;    4.  at 

*  Appendix  to  Part  Fint,  American  edition,  p.  58. 


56 


THE  IinOIAN  LANiCnTAOXS. 


Lnke  Pucktray ;  5.  Portage  of  the  Ouisconsing ;  6  and  7.  both 
on  Roche  River... ..From  the  tradition  amongst  them,  and  their 
speaking  the  same  language  of  the  Otos  of  the  River  Platte,  I 
aia  confident  in  asserting  tnat  they  are  a  nation  who  have  emi* 
grated  from  Mexico  to  avoid  the  oppression  of  the  Spaniards.^' 
— Pike^  Appendix^  p.  5C.  The  specimen  of  their  language,  in 
the  following  Vocabulary,  was  obligingly  furnished  oy  Pro- 
fessor Say. 


both 
their 
tte,  I 
emi- 
pds/' 
5e,in 
Pro- 


GOMPARATIVE  VOCABULARY 


•V 


TARI0U8   PIALECTS 


or  THE 


LENAPE  (or  Delaware)  STOCK 


or 


NORTH  AMERICAN  LANGUAGES: 


TOGETHER  WITH 


A    SPECIMEN 


OF  THE 


WINNEBAGO  (on  Nipeoon)  LANGUAGE. 


58 


THE  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


1.  A  bear 

2.  A  Ipeaver 

3.  Eye 

4.  Ear 

5.  Fetch 

6.  My  Grandfather 

7.  My  Grandmother 
9.  My  Grandchild 
9.  He  Eoes 

10.  A  Girl 

11.  House 

12.  He  (that  man) 

13.  His  Head 

14.  His  Heait 

15.  Hair 

16.  Her  Husband 

17.  His  teeth 

18.  I  thank  you 

19.  My  oncle 

20.  I 

21.  Thou 

22.  We 

23.  Ye 

24.  Water 

S5.  Elder  sister 

26.  River 

27.  To  die  (I  die) 

28.  Dead  (he  is  dead) 

29.  Devil 

30.  Dress  the  kettle  (make  a  fire) 

31.  His  Eyes 

32.  Fire 

33;  Give  it  him 

34.  A  spirit  (a  spectre) 

35.  How 

36.  An  impostor  (he  is  a  bad  man) 

37.  Go 

38.  Marry 

39.  Good  Cor  nought 

40.  Shoe 

41.  The  sun 

42.  Sit  down 

43.  Where 

44.  Winter 

45.  Wood 


MOHEOAJ^. 
(From  Edwardt.) 


1.  Mquoh 

2.  Amisque    (1)  * 

3.  Hkeesque  \ 

4.  Towohque 

5.  Pautoh 

6.  Nemoghhome    (2) 

7.  Nohhum 

8.  Nauehees 

9.  Pumissoo 

10.  Peesquasoo 

11.  Weekuwuhm 

12.  Uwoh 

13.  Weensis 

14.  Utoh 

15.  WeghaukuD 

16.  Waughecheh 

17.  Wepeeton 

18.  Wneeweh 

19.  Nsees 

20.  Neah 

21.  Keah 

22.  Neaunuh 

23.  Keaunuh 

24.  :Nbey 

25.  Nmees 

26.  Sepoo 

27.  Nip 

28.  Nboo  or  nepoo    (3) 

29.  Mtandou  or  mannito    (4) 

30.  Pootouwauh 

31.  Ukeesquan 

32.  Stauw 

33.  Meenuh 

34.  Mannito 

35.  Tuneh    (5) 

36.  Mtissoo 

37.  Pumisseh 

38.  Weeween 

39.  Mtit 

40.  Mkissiu 

41.  Keesogh 

42.  Mattipeh  ^ 

43.  Tehah 

44.  Hpoon 

45.  Metooque 


*  See  the  Explanatory  Remarks  at  the  end  of  this  Vocabulary. 


THB  IHDfAN  LAIIOUAOE3. 


99 


(4) 


MOHBOAJf. 

LEffAPE^  or  Dekmmre. 

(From  the  Rev.  WHIiam  Jenka ;    in 

(From  the  Hev.  Mr.  Heckewelder.) 

Matt.  Hist.  Coll.  vol.  ix.  p.  98.) 

1. 

1.  Machk 

2. 

2.  Tam&que 

3. 

3.  Wmchgiuk    (8) 

4. 

4.  WhitUwakall  (fhtnil) 

5.  N&tem  (tu  t'(i;tch) 

5. 

6.  Mjlhghom&n    (^ 

6.  N'muchomei 

T.  Ohm&a  (a  grftBtlL-^other) 

7.  Nohum 

8. 

8.  Nochwis 

9. 

■  9i  Waeu  or  eu 

10.  Peesquftthuh 

10;  Ochqu^sis 

ll.Weekwom 

ll.Wikwam    (9) 

12. 

12.  Neka«na 

IS. 

13.WU    (10) 

14. 

14.  Wdee 

15. 

15.  Milach 

16.  W'gMkn  (a  husbsnd) 

16.  Wechian 

17. 

17.  Wipitall 

18. 

18.  Gknamel 

19.  OosSth&n  (an  uoele) 

m  N'schia 

20. 

20iNi 

21. 

ai.  Ki 

22. 

>22.Nil<ina^kUuna 

23. 

23.  Kildwa 

24.  M'ppSh 

'24.Mbi      \ 

25i 

25.  Mis 

26.  Thgpow    (T) 

'26.Sfpu 

27. 

27.  Angel          .:•?''" 

28. 

28.  Angelliikifei'    ^ 

29. 

29.  MachMMBilMnit-inamtto- 

30. 

30.TeBSRr(ll) 

31. 

31.  Wuschgiok (-all  pbral) 

32.  Thtouw 

32.  Tendey 

33. 

33.  Milan 

34. 

34.  Tschipey,  tschitschank     (18) 

35. 

35.  Taam 

36. 

36.  MatBchileno 

37. 

37.  Aal  (imperative) 

38. 

38.  Wikingen  (to  marry) 

39. 

39.  Takfieu  lapemquattowi 

40. 

40.  Maxen 

41.  Kesogh 

41.  Gischuch 

42. 

42.  Lematt&chpil    (13) 

43.  Tani.  ta-talli 

43. 

44.  Poon 

44.  L6waa 

45.            - 

45.Tachan 

9 


60 


THE  INDIAN  LAN0UA0E8. 


JdUJ^SEE,  or  Minti. 

SHAWAJ^ESE. 

SHAWAIfESE. 

(from  Barton*!  JVetc 

(From  Edwards.) 

(From  Archseologia  A> 

Fiewt.) 

mericana.) 

1. 

1.  Mauquah 

1.  Muga 

2.  Amochk,  H. 

(14) 

2.  Amaquah 

2.  Amaghqua 

S.  Wuschgiiik 

3.  SkeeHaco 

S. 

4.  Wichtawak 

4.  Towacah 

4. 

5. 

5.  Peatuloo 

*•       . 

d. 

6.  Nemasompethau 

6.       ' 

7. 

7.  Nocumthau 

7.  Cocumtha  (joiir?]| 

8. 

8.  Noosihetbuu 

8. 

9. 

9.  Pomthalo 

9. 

10.  Ochquesis 

11.  Wichquam 

10.  Squauthauthau 

11.  Wecuah 

10.  Squithetha 

11.  Wigwa 

12. 

12.  Welah 

12. 

13.  Wilustican 

13.Wee8eh    (16) 

13. 

14.  Uchdee 

14.  Otaheh 

14. 

15. 

15.  Welathoh 

Iff. 

16. 

16.  Wasecheh 

16.  WTsheana 

17.  Wichpit  (tooth) 

17.  Wepeetalee 

17. 

18. 

18.  Neauweh 

18. 

19. 

19.  Neeseethau 

19. 

20.  Ni 

20.  Nelah 

20. 

21. 

21.  Relah 

81. 

22. 

22.  Nelauweh 

S8. 

23. 

23.  Kelauweh 

83. 

24.  'Mbi 

24.  Nippee 

24.Nipe 

25. 

25.  Nemeethau 

25.  Neesheinatha(m7) 

26. 

26.  Thepee 

26.  Sepe 

27.  Angellowoagan  (is 

27. 

27. 

28. 

28. 

28.  Nepwa 

29. 

till" 

29. 

29.  Matchemenetoo 

30. 
31. 

.-^ 

t: 

SO. 
SI. 

S2.Tendeu  or 

twen- 

32. 

32.  Scoote 

33. 

|daigh 

33. 

S3. 

34. 

34. 

S4. 

35. 

35. 

Sff. 

36. 

36. 

86. 

37. 

37. 

sr. 

38. 

38. 

88. 

39. 

39. 

d9. 

40. 

40. 

40. 

41.  Gischuch 

41. 

41.  Kesathwa 

42. 

42. 

42. 

43. 

43. 

43.                     V 

44.  Lowan 

44. 

44. 

45.  Cho8 

45. 

45. 

THE  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


ei 


(From  Gen.  Murray  and  Mr.  Heck- 
ewelder.) 


NARAQANSET. 

(From  Rogtr  WMiami.') 


1.  Winquipim ;  winkpen,  H. 

S.  Nataque 

S.  Nucks,  skeneeau&t,  H. 

4.  Nuch,  tow,  buck 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

10.  Pecb,  quah 

11.  Youck, buck;  iahaak,  B. 
12. 

13.  Nulahammon  (the  bead) 

14.  Weuscheu  (heart) 
15. 

16.  Wechsiki  (hustmnd) 

17.  WUpt  (tooth) 
18. 

19. 

SO.  Nee 

21.  Kee 

22. 

23. 

S4.  Nip ;  nep 

25.  Nimpz 

26.  Pamptttckquah,  peemtuk,  H. 

27.  Angel  (death) 
28. 

29.  Matt,  ann-tote 
SO. 

31.  MukschkiDtsch  (the  eye) 

32.  Tunt 
33. 

34.  Tsee^-p  (ghost,  dead  man) 

35. 

36. 

37. 

38. 

39. 

40.  Mechkissins 

41.  Aquiquaque;   ahquak;  ack- 

42.  [quechkq.  H. 
43. 

44.  Poopponu,  huppoon,  H, 

45.  PoDip-tuck*koiK,  michach,  H. 


1. 
2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 
27. 
28. 
2*:. 
30. 
31. 
32. 
33. 
34. 
35. 
36. 
37. 
38. 
39. 
40. 
41. 
42. 
43. 
44. 
45. 


Mosk  (17) 
Tummuck 
WuskeeHuck 
Wutt6vwog 
Pautiinnea     (18) 


Squ&sese  (little  girl) 

Wetu    (19) 

Ew6  (he.  that) 

Uppaquontup  (the  bead) 

Wuttkh 

Wesheck 

Wasick  (an  husband) 

Wepitteash 

TaADotneatuitodiyean 

Nissese 

Neen 

Ke^n 


Nip 

Weticks,  w^esummis 

Seip 

Nippitch  ewd     (20) 

Kitonckquei,  (he  is  dead ) 

Potouw4ssiteuck  (let  us  make) 

Squtta  or  note  or  yote 


Ma<ichish  or  knakish   (be  go> 

C»ng) 

Moc<issinas3  and  mockussin- 

N  ipp&wus  (21)     [chass  ( pf .) 

Mattapsh 

Tou 

Papdne 

Wudtuckqun 


•2 


THE  INDIAN    LANGUAOFB. 


MASSACHUSETTS. 
(From  Elivl.) 


PEJVOBSCOT. 
(French  MiMionariet*  MK.) 


1.  Mosq 

2.  Tummunk 

S.  Muskeesuk    (22) 

4.  Mehtauog 

5.  Paudtah 
6. 

7.  KokummuMit 

8. 

9. 

10.  Nunksqua 

11.  Wetu    (23) 

12.  Noh  or  nagum 

13.  Puhkuk 

14.  Wuttah 

15.  Weshagan    (24) 

16.  Waauk  or  wessuke 

17.  Meepitash 

18.  Ruttabuttantamoush 

19.  Wussissesoh  (his  uncle) 

20.  Neen 

21.  Ken 

22.  Neenawun  or  kenauwun 

23.  Kenaau 

24.  Nippe 
25. 

26.  Sepu 

27.  Ut>nuppun  (to  die) 

28.  Nuppoo  (he  died) 

29.  Mattannit 
SO. 

81.  Wuskesukquash  (plur.) 

32.  Nflotau 

S3.  Aninnumau 

34.  Mattanit 

35. 

36. 

37.  Pomushagk 

38.  Wetauakon  (to  marrj) 
07. 

40.  Moxinash  (plur.) 

41.  Nepauz    (25) 

42.  Apsh  (imperat.) 

43.  Uttiyeu 

44.  Pop6n 

45.  Mehtug  or  nrahtug 


1. 

3.  Toumakoi 

3.  Ousisegoul  (ejea) 

4.  N  tawag  (my  ear) 
5. 

6.  Mousomesse 

7.  Nakoume 
8. 

9. 

10.  Nanskois 

11.  "Wigwam 

1 2.  Egman 
13. 

14. 

1 5.  Piasoumal 

16.  Ousainampaimal 
17.Nipit 

18. 

19. 

20.  Nia 

Sl.Kia 

22.  Niona 

23. 

24.  Kneppi 

25 

26!  Sibo 

27.  Matchinai 

28. 

29. 

30. 

31. 

32.  Scoute 

S3. 

34. 

35.  Tanequapa 

36. 

37. 

38.  Ounipawi 

39. 

40. 

41.  Gisous 

42. 

43.  Tanai 

44.  Papoun 

45.  Awaisounal 


THE  INDIAN  LAIfOUAOES. 


B.) 


JlBff^lKI. 

ST.  FR^JWIS  /JVDMJVS. 

(From  Futher  RAWt  M9.  Dictionary.) 

(From  Rer.  Ur.  Holmei  and  Rev.  Mr. 

Noyci.) 

1.  Aw^BRtffl 

1.  OWOUHOUS 

2.  Tcma'ki* 

2.  Temarqua     (28) 

9.  Tsisekw 

3.  Woosesuck 

4.  Mela«aktf  or  mtavakw 

4.  Wootououk 

5.  Nep^Un  (1  bring) 

5.  Melee 

6.  NetDMvmes 

6.  NemahhOme 

7.  N^k^mes 

7.  Nocomus 

8. 

8.  Nocia 

9.  Nepem^ss^  (I  go) 
10.  Naiikakw^ 

9.  Acomma  mousjou 
10.  Nunkiiquaakis 

1 1.  «ig«am 

11.  M'Mgwam 

12. 

12.  Acomma  (29) 

13.  vtep 

1 3.  Tasaoulquoii 

14.  Ner^vaiigan  (mj  heart) 

14.  Wollewongon 

15.  Nepi^Bwmar  (my  hair) 

15.  Hotopequon 

16. 

16.  Neswear 

17.  Nipit  (my  tooth) 

17.  Webeit 

18.  Kedaramihi 

18.  Neerwillewoone 

19.  Neaii 

19.  Nesorkscias 

SO. 

20.  Neah 

tl. 

21.  Moaork 

ti. 

22.  Keunnah 

23. 

23.  Keah 

24.  Nebi 

24.  Nelibee  or  nupee 

25. 

25.  Nechemeea  (aiater) 

26.  Sipv 

26.  Seeboo  or  aeepoo 

27.  Nemetsia^  (I  die) 

27.  Machener 

28. 

28.  Accomma  machener 

29.  MatsiniM^'skH 

29.  Mattchantoo 

SO.  Nept/daue     (26) 

30.  Walleloo  scoottah 

81. 

31.  Accommane  wooaesuck 

32.  Sk  Jtai 

32.  Squuttah  or  scoottah 

S3.  Nem^ghen  (I  give  it) 

33,  Melaun  (give  it) 

34. 

34.  Orweppee 

35.  Taiini 

35.  Turne 

S6. 

36.  Kulok  sannup 

97. 

37.  Pumoosah  or  mouaho 

SH 

38.  Nepowo  or  weewooh 

89. 

39.  Pesoworto 

40.  Mkessen 

40.  Mokaain  or  mokkausin 

41.KiztfS 

41.  Keesooa 

42.  Nedapi  (I  sit) 

42.  Appeh  or  arpee 

43. 

43.  Tauneh 

44.  PebHn,  pebjtn^     (27) 

44.  Pehboon  or  perpoon 

45.  Aaasstfa 

45.  Arparae 

^ 


m 


THC   INDIAN    LANGUAGES. 


MESSia^UO^S. 

ALQOJ^KIJf. 

(From  Barton*it  Mne  Viewt.) 

(From  La  Hoiitan.) 

1. 

1.  Mackuua 

t. 

2.  Ainik 

3.  Wuikink 

3.  Ouskinchifl 

4. 

4. 

5. 

J. 

& 

6. 

r. 

7. 

1. 

8. 

9. 

9. 

10. 

10.  Ickouessens 

|I» 

11.  Entajant  (home) 

it. 

12. 

18. 

13.  Ousticouan  (head) 

14 

14.  Micheone  (heart) 

10. 

15. 

10. 

16. 

If. 

17.  Tibit  (teeth) 

18. 

18. 

J9. 

19. 

SO.  Nindoh 

20. 

SI. 

21. 

m* 

22. 

as. 

23. 

24.  Nippee 

24.  Nipi 

S0. 

25. 

flS. 

26.  Sipim 

27. 

27.  Nip 

88. 

28. 

99, 

29.  Matchi 

80. 

30.  Poutaoue 

St. 

31. 

32.  Scuttaw,  Bcutteh,  scooteh 

32.  Scoute 

88. 

33.  Mi  la  (give^ 

34.  Manitou  (ghoit,  dead  man) 

84. 

80. 

35.  Tani 

86. 

36.  Maiatissi  (impostor) 

87. 

37. 

88. 

38. 

89. 

39. 

40. 

40.  Mackiain 

41.Keeshoo 

41. 

42. 

42. 

43. 

43.  Ta 

44. 

44.  Pipoun 

45.  Netaukun 

45.  Mittick 

f 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAOE8. 


66 


ALOOJ^KW. 
(From  MoKcniia.) 


nan) 


1. 
2. 
S. 
4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9, 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
SO. 
21. 
99.. 
23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 
27. 
28. 
29. 
SO. 
31. 
32. 
33. 
34. 
35. 
36. 
37. 
38. 
39. 
40. 
41. 
42. 
43. 
44. 
45. 


Mai' qua 
Atnic 
Oskingick 
Utawagane 

Ni-mi-chomiM 


Ochiti-goine 
Othai 
Winessig 
Ni  na  bem 
Nihit  (my) 

Ni  ni  michomen 
Nin  (I  or  me) 
Kin  (you  or  thou) 

Ninawa 

Nipei 

Nimisain 

Sipi 

Nipowen 

Matchi  manitou 

Oskingick  (eyes) 
Scoutay 
Mih  (to  give) 


Pemoussai  (to  walk) 


Makisin 

Kijis 

Na  matape  win  (to  sit  dowii) 

Pipone 
Mitic 


CHIPPKtVAY. 
(From  Edwardi.) 


1.  Mackwah 

2.  Aniik 
3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

ft 
10. 

II.  Wigwaum 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 

24!  Nebbi 
25. 

26.  Sippim 

27.  Nip 

28.  Neepoo 

29.  Manitou 

30.  Puutwah 

31.  Wiskinkhie 

32.  Scutta 

33.  Millaw 

34.  Manitou 

35.  Tawn^ 

36.  Mawlawtissie 
3/.  r'mmoussie 
So.  VVeewin 

39.  Malatit 

40.  Maukissin 

41.  Kissis 

42.  Mintipin 

43.  Tab 

44.  Pepoun 

45.  Mittic 


TOC  INDIAN  LANOUAOE8. 


CHIP  FENWAY. 

(From  Long'B  Tnv«b,  I<ond.  edit. 
1791.) 


1.  Mackqu&h 

2.  Amik 

3.  Wiskiokj  (ejes) 

4.  N<iadawan 
5. 

& 

r. 

8. 
9. 

10.  Equoy since 

11.  Wigwaum 
12. 

IS.  Eshtergdan 

14.  Uathtj 

15.  LisBj  (human  hair)    (3G) 

16.  Nabaim 

17.  Weebit 

18.  Neegwotch 
19. 

20.  Nin,  nee  (I,  me,  my) 

21.  Ke6n,  kee  (thou,  you) 

22.  Neennerwind  (we,  us,  our) 

23.  Keennerwind  (ye,  your) 

24.  Nippee 
25. 

26.  Seepee 
27. 

28.  Neepoo 

29.  Matchee  mannitoo 

30.  Footer  chebockwoy 
31. 

32.  Scota^  or  squitty 

33.  DarmiBsey 
34. 

35.  Tawny 
36. 

37.  PamosAy  (go,  walk) 

38.  Tuckunnumkewish 
39. 

40.  Maukkissin 

41.  Geessessey 

42.  Mantetappy 

43.  Adnday 

44.  Bebone 

45.  Meteek 


(Fro«  McKegiie.) 


1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 


Masqua 

AmisK 

Es  kis  och  feyes) 

O  tow  ee  gie 

Ne  moo  ahum 
N'o  kum 


Us  ti  quoia 

Othea 

Wes  ty  ky 

Ni  nap  pem  {my). 

Wip  pit  tan 

NVkamitt}'  (my) 

Nitha 

Kitha  (thou,  y^ou) 

Nithawaw 

Kitha  (you,  thou) 

Nepee 


Sipee 
Nepew 


Scou  tay 
Mith  (to  give) 


24. 

25. 

26. 

27. 

28. 

29. 

30. 

81. 

82. 

33. 

34. 

35. 

36. 

37.  Pimoataiss  (to  widk) 

38. 

39. 

40. 

41. 

43« 

43. 

44. 

45. 


Maskisin 

Pisim 

Nematappe 

Pipoun 
Miatick 


THE  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


67 


KmSTEfTEjiUX. 

WmJfEBAOO  (or  JVtppeyon.) 

(From  HannonU  Journal.    1830.) 

(From  Profesior  Say.) 

1>  M>isk-quaw 

1. 

2.  A-misk 

2.  Nah-a>pah 

3.  Mift-kee-sick 

3.  Shtassoo  (eyes) 

4.  Me-t&-w&-ki 

4.  Naunt-shou-ah  (ears) 

5. 

5. 

6.  E-mo^home 

6. 

7.  O-kome 

7. 

8. 

8. 

9. 

9. 

10. 

10. 

11. 

11. 

12. 

12. 

13.  Is-te-gwen 

13.  Nahs-soo  (head) 

14.  Nach-keh  (heart) 
15. 

14.             X 

15.  Mis-te-ky-ah 

16.  Ne-iiM>em 

16. 

17.  Mee-pit  (tooth) 

17.  Hee  (teetli) 

18.  We-n&-cum-in& 

18.           ^        ' 

19.  0-ko<iniss 

19. 

20. 

20. 

21. 

21. 

22.  Ne-on 

22. 

23. 

23.  Ne^jh 

24.  Ne>pee 

24.  Nee-nah ;  iieeh 

25.  E-ini8S 

25. 

26.  Se-pee 

26.  Nee>shan-nuk 

27. 

27. 

28. 

28.  Ah-noo  (dead) 

29. 

29. 

30. 

30. 

31. 

31.  Shtas-soo  (eyes) 

32.  Es^juit-tu 

32.  Peych  or  pyche 

33.  Me-jow,  maj^    (31) 

83. 

34. 

34. 

35.  Ta.nMay 

35. 

36. 

36. 

sr.  Ke>to-tain  (to  go) 

37. 

38.  Wee-ke-muw 

38. 

39.  Na-ni&w-ca-qui'-me-wft^in 

39. 

40.  Mos-ca-sin 

40. 

41.  Pe-sim     (32) 

41.  Weedah 

42.  Ap-pee 

42. 

43.  Ta^Dc-tay 

43. 

44.  Pe-poon 

44. 

45.  Mis<tick  (firewood) 

45. 

10 

•% 


THE  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


EXPLANATORY  REMARKS  ON  THE  PRECEDING  COMPARATIVE 

VOCABULARY. 


MOHEOAN. 

(1)  ^misqw.  "  E  final  is  never  sounded  in  any  Indian  word 
which  I  write,  except  roonoayllables."    Edwards. 

(2)  JVemo^^home.  "  Oh  in  any  Indian  word  has  the  strong  gut- 
tural sound,  which  is  given  by  the  Scots  to  the  same  letters  in  the 
words  tough,  enough,  &c."    Edw. 

(S)    ^Tboo  or  nepoo.   "The  first  syllable  scarcely  sounded."  Edw. 

(4)  Mtandou  or  mannito.  "  The  last  of  these  words  properly 
signifies  a  spectre  or  any  thing  frightful."  Edw.  See  the  remarks 
of  Mr.  Heckewelder  on  the  word  tschipey,  a  spirit,  in  the  Delaware 
language ;  No.  12.  infra. 

(5)  Tuneh.  "  Wherever  u  occurs,  it  has  not  the  long  sound  of  the 
English  u  as  in  commune  ;  but  the  sound  of  u  in  uncle,  though  much 
protracted.  The  other  vowels  are  to  be  pronounced  as  in  Edglish." 
Edw. 

(6)  MahghomAn.  "  Wherever  gh  occurs  in  the  above  specimen, 
the  pronunciation  is  extremely  guttural,  and  appears  to  be  a  strong 
characteristick  of  the  language,  hardly  imitable  by  us."    Jenks. 

(7)  Thepow.    "  TA  sounded  as  in  thing."    Jenks. 

Tne  recurrence  of  this  sound  of  th,  in  Mr.  Jenks'  specimen  of  Mo- 
heean,  in  cases  where  Dr.  Edwards  uses  the  letter  s,  constitutes  a 
striking  difference  between  their  two  vocabularies.  This  circum- 
stance once  led  the  Editor  to  suspect,  that  the  difference  might  possi- 
bly have  been  occasioned  by  some  inattention  in  writing  down  the 
words.  But  Mr.  J.  (whose  great  accuracy  is  well  known)  in  answer 
to  an  inquiry  on  this  point,  says — "  With  respect  to  the  sound  of  tht 
in  my  scanty  specimen  of  Mohegan,  published  in  1804, 1  well  recol- 
lect my  informant's  pronunciation,  and  have  correctly  described  it, 
I  find,  as  being  like  th  in  thing."  Unless,  therefore,  the  individual 
Indian  in  question  had  a  defective  utterance,  that  occasioned  a  lisp- 
ing pronunciation  of  the  letter  s,  (which,  however,  Mr.  J.  does  not 
intimate  to  have  been  the  case)  the  specimen  under  consideration 
apparently  belongs  to  a  different  dialect  of  the  Mohegan  from  that 
spoken  by  the  Stockbridge  tribe.  Its  close  resemblance  to  the  Sha- 
wanese,  in  this  sound  of  th,  deserves  notice ;  the  more  particularly  so, 
as  that  sound  is  not  found  in  the  other  dialects  of  the  Comparative 
V  ocabulary,  with  the  exception  of  the  Knisteneaux,  in  a  few  in- 
stances. 

Lenape,  or  Delaware.       .  ^ 

(8)  Wusehpnk.  The  student  will  observe,  that  the  German 
writers  of  Indian  words  often  use  the  letter  g  in  cases  where  aa 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAGC&. 


69 


Englishman  or  Frenchman,  for  example,  would  use  fc ;  and  the  sub- 
stitution of  k  for  g  will  often  disclose  analogies  that  are  not  at  first 
obvious.  In  the  present  instance,  the  Indian  words  for  eye,  in  the 
kindred  dialects,  are  generally  written  by  English  and  other  writers 
with  the  letter  k,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  Vocabulary.  So  the  word  for 
sun,  which  in  Delaware  is  written  with  g  (gischuch)  is  commonly^ 
written  by  the  French  and  English  with  Ar;  as  keesogh,  keeauck, 
kixous,  &c.  There  are  undoubtedly  slight  modifications  of  this 
sound  in  different  dialects,  which  would  sometimes  reauire  the  use 
of  ^  and  sometimes  of  A:;  but  the  remark  of  Mr.  Heckewelder  on 
this  point  should  be  kept  in  mind  by  the  student :  "  Sometimes  (says 
he)  the  letters  c  or  ^  are  used  in  writing  the  Delaware  language  in- 
stead of  k,  to  shew  that  this  consonant  is  not  pronounced  too  nard  ; 
but,  in  general,  c  and  g  have  been  used  as  substitutes  for  k,  because 
our  printers  had  not  a  sufficient  supply  of  types  for  that  character."^* 

(9)  Wikitam.    «  The  i  long,  as  ee."    Ueckewelder. 

(10)  mi.    « The  i  long."    Heckew. 

(11)  Tendeuhel,  make  a  fire.  "  I  could  send  you  no  prober  word 
for  dress  the  kettle,  as  the  Indiana  have  no  such  expression."  Letter 
from  Mr.  Ueckewelder  to  the  Editor, 

(12)  Tschipey  or  tschitschank.  "  The  word  tschitschank,  for  the 
soul  or  spirit  in  man,  is  the  only  proper  word,  and  none  other  is  to  be 
made  use  of  in  discoursing  on  religion  or  religious  subjects ;  though 
tschipey  has  been  made  use  of,  even  by  missionaries,  who  knew  no 
better,  and  had  learned  it  so  from  Indi-ins,  who  had  no  conception  of 
the  purity  of  the  soul  or  spirit,  other  than  that  after  this  life  they 
would  undergo  a  transformation,  similar  to  something  they  had  not 
before  seen.  Therefore  they  call  the  place  or  world  thev  are  to  go 
to  after  death,  Tschi-pey-ach-gink  or  racliipeyhacking,  tne  world  of 
spirits,  spectres  or  ghosts  ;  where  they  imagine  are  various  frightful 
figures.  None  of  our  old  converted  Indians  would  suffer  the  word 
Tschipey  to  be  made  use  of  in  a  spiritual  sense;  and  all  our  Indians 
were  perfectly  agreed,  that  Tschitschank  implied  the  immortal  soul 
or  spirit  of  man ;  and  they  had  a  reverence  for  the  word  itself, 
whereas  the  other  had  something  terrifying  in  it."  Letter  from  Mr. 
Ueckewelder. 

(13)  Lematachpil.    "  The  i  long."    Heckew. 

MiNSI. 

(14)  .Amochk.  This  Minsi  word  is  from  Mr.  Heckewelder's 
letter,  before  cited  ;  all  the  others  are  from  Barton,  who  informs  us, 
that  they  also  were  originally  obtained  from  Mr.  Heckewelder.  JVcio 
Views,  preface,  p.  x. 

(15)  Jingellowottgan.  The  termination -u-oag-an,  fwhich  corres- 
|)onds  to  -ness  in  English  and  -heit  or  -keit  in  German)  is  commonly 
written  wagan  by  Mr.  Ueckewelder;  who  informs  us,  that  the  Ger- 


Correspond.  with  Mr.  Uu  Ponceuu,  Letter  xi.  p.  382. 


70 


THE  INDIAN   LANGUAGES. 


man  missionaries  sometimes  put  the  letter  o  after  the  w  in  order  to 
express  the  English  sound  of  this  last  letter.  Correspondence  with 
Mr.  Ou  Ponceau,  Letter  xviii. 

Shawanese,  or  Shawanoese. 

(16)  ffetaeh.  Dr.  Edwards  thinks  this  word  is  mis*spelt,  for 
weenseh.    Observations,  p.  6. 

Naraoanset. 

(17)  J^ofilr,  -  As  the  Greekes  and  other  nations  and  ourselvea 
call  tne  Kven  Starres,  or  Charles'  Waine,  the  Beare,  so  doe  they 
([the  Indi'^asj  mosk  or  pauXtrunnauratr,  the  Beare."  William^  Key^ 
preface. 

(18)  TavAiinnea,  bring  hither. 

(19)  Wetu,  an  house ;  wetuomuck,  at  home. 

(20)  M%ppitch  ewd,  let  him  die. 

(21)  tNippAwus,  sun.    Kesuck  is  used  for  the  heavens^, 

Massachusetts. 

(23)  Muskeesuk,  eye  or  face. 

(2S)  W4tu.  "  Weekuwout  or  wekuwomut,  in  his  house.  Hence 
we  corrupt  this  word  wigwam."    Eliot*s  Oram,  p.  11. 

(24)  Weshogan  ;  the  hnir  of  beasts. 

(25)  M'epaux,  sun,  Kesuk  is  used  for  the  heavens^  as  in  the  Na^ 
raganset  di^lect^ 

Abnaki. 

(26)  Mptfdane,  I  blow  the  fire.     BMe. 

(27)  Pebvn,  the  present  winter ;  pebtme,  the  past  winter.    Sdle^ 

St.  Francis. 

(28)  Temarqua.  In  this  specimen  of  the  St.  Francis  dialect,  the 
letters  ar  and  or  and  ur  appear  to  be  used  frequently  to  denote  the 
sounds  which  we  usually  denote  in  English  by  ah,  aw  and  uh. 

(29)  ^commS,  he.    <•  ^orsannup,  that  man." 

Chippeway. 
(SO)     Lissy,  human  hair.    ^'  Opeeway,  hair  of  blasts."    Long. 

Knisteneaux. 

(31)  Meyow,maygUi  to  gi\e.    Harmon,  \ 

(32)  Peesim,  sun ;  keesick,  sky.    Harmon, 


THE   INDIAN  LANOUAG.SS. 


71 


Sale^ 


NOTE  16. 
On  the  Winnebago  JKaleeU 

From  the  annexed  Comparative  Vocabulary  it  is  already  ap- 
parent, that  the  Winnebago  dialect  does  not  belong  to  the  Lena- 
pe  (or  Delaware)  stock,  as  was  supposed  at  the  time  when  Dr. 
Edwards  wrote.  This  error  has  been  accordingly  corrected, 
(upon  the  authority  of  Professor  Say)  in  the  Notes  upon  that 
Vocabulary  ;  where  it  is  further  observed,  that  the  dialect  in 

auestion  has  been  since  found  to  belong  to  the  Sioux  or  Nau> 
owessie  stock.  *  The  Editor  now  has  it  in  his  power,  through 
the  kindness  of  Mr.  Du  Ponceau,  to  exhibit  a  small  Table  of 
several  dialects,  belonging  to  this  latter  stock  ;  which  will  satis- 
factorily show  the  affinity  of  the  Winnebago,  and  at  the  same 
time  form  a  useful  addition  to  our  Indian  vocabularies,  t  Mr. 
Du  Ponceau,  in  his  letters,  makes  the  following  observations  on 
this  point : 

"  I  send  you  eight  words  in  seven  different  dialects  of  what  I 
call  the  Sioux  or  J^faudoziiessie  race  of  Indians.  You  will  see 
that  it  extends  from  Lake  Michigan  to  Louisiana,  and  forms  one 
of  what  I  call  the  two  gr  ?at  Ultra^issisim)ian  Languages  ;  the 
other  is  the  Pawnee,  or  Panis,  of  which  1  have  a  vocabulary, 
but  none  of  the  idioms  of  its  cognate  tribes.  Those  I  under- 
stand to  be  the  Keres,  C'omanches,  Kiaways,  Paducas  and 
others,  yet  but  little  known.  Major  Long  had  cc"*cted  vocab- 
ularies of  those  languages  on  his  expedition  to  the  westward  ; 
but  they  were  lost  by  the  desertion  to  thd  Indians  of  a  party  of 
men  who  had  charge  of  them.  This  Professor  Vater  bitterly 
lameni^,  in  a  no<e  at  the  end  of  the  second  part  of  his  Analtkten 
der  Sprackeii  kunde.  That  these  languages  are  branches  of  the 
Pawnee  is  a  surmise  of  some  of  our  travellers  ;  the  fact  itself 
however,  as  we  have  no  vocabularies  of  them,  we  cannot  com- 
pletely ascertain  ;  but  it  appears  to  me  very  probable,  because 
the  Pawnee  being  a  language  sui  generis,  and  having  no  connex- 
ion in  etymology  with  the  Sioux  branch,  it  is  nearly  evident 
that  it  does  not  stand  single  ;  therefore  I  have  put  the  Pawnee 
by  the  side  of  the  Sioux,  at  the  head  of  a  second  class,  and  I 
have  little,  if  any  doubt,  that  the  fact  will  turn  out  so,  when 
vocabularies  shall  enable  us  to  ascertain  it." 

An  accurate  classification  of   the  Indian  Languages  must 
necessarily  be  a  work  of  great  labour,  and  for  which  we  are 


*  See  p.  54. 


t  See  p.  73. 


72 


THE   INDIAN  LANOUAOES. 


not  yet  in  possession  of  sufficient  materials.  It  is  a  remark- 
able fact,  and  one  which  should  be  duly  weighed  by  American 
scholars,  that,  for  the  best  systematick  arrangement  of  the  lan- 
guages of  our  own  continent,  we  are  still  obliged  to  resort  to 
the  learned  of  ihe  old  world.  To  them  we  ore  indebted  for 
that  wonderful  monument  of  philology,  thr  Mstkri  dates  ;  in, 
which  is  io  be  found  the  substance  of  all  Lhft  was  known  res- 

Secting  the  languages  of  America,  unti'  ihc  ble  pubiicatioru  of 
[r.  Heckcwelder  and  Mr.  Du  Ponceau..  In  tnat  work  \.  <;  \d 
a  classification  of  the  Indian  In  nguagcjj  irjaiso  ..itu  ..  sru^u'y 
and  justness  of  d isc rim i ration,  which  ?ire  truly  astorwsiiing, 
when  we  cofisider  under  what  disadvantages  it  must  have  been 
undertaken  by  writers,  who  are  placed  at  so  great  a  distance 
from  the  couniries  where  those  languages  are  spoken,  '''he 
classification  there  given  (boil)  of  tr  ^  American  an  1  ail  'he 
other  languages  ol  the  globe)  is  made  with  so  much  cire  and 
ability,  that  it  has  been  follower!  bv  tha  piesfnt  '  arni^rl  Adt- 
lung^  n\  his  late  Survey  of  all  the  knoivn  LanfiPages  uud  Umr  Dia- 
Ifts.  *  By  i.he  labours  of  ihe  diotingiiished  philologists  above- 
mf -uioncd.,  and  of  Baron  William  von  Humboldt  (who  is  now 
devottt^g  his  eminent  talents  to  the  Amtrican  languages  in  par- 
1.1'uiar)  vvfc  may  hope  soon  to  be  possessed  of  as  perfect  a  clas- 
sification, and  as  accurate  general  views  of  these  languages,  as 
can  be  desired.  But  while  learned  foreigners  are  thus  devoting 
themselves  to  the  more  general  views  of  the  American  languages, 
the  scholars  of  our  own  country  should  not  neglect  to  employ  the 
means,  which  their  local  situation  affords  them,  of  carefully  col- 
lecting all  those  details  of  the  variou;^  dialects,  which  will  be 
essential  to  the  formation  of  an  exact  classification  of  them,  and 
to  the  ultimate  object  of  these  inquiries — a  just  theory  of  lan- 
guage. Much  has  been  recently  done,  in  both  these  respects,  by 
Mr.  Du  Ponceau  and  Mr.  Heckewelder,  whose  publications  upon 
ithis  subject  (apparently  dry  and  barren,  but  in  reality  interest- 
ing and  fertile  in  results)  have  eminently  contributed  to  the 
common  stock  of  learning  and  to  the  elevation  of  our  literary 
character.  But,  it  may  be  added  (as  Mr.  Du  Ponceau  himself 
observes)  that "  the  knowledge,  which  the  world  in  general  has 

acquired  of  the  American  languages,  is  yet  very  limited The 

study  of  the  different  languages  of  the  different  races  of  men, 
considered  in  relation  to  their  internal  structure  and  gram- 
matical forms,  has  but  lately  begun  to  be  attended  to,  and  may 
still  be  considered  as  being  in  its  infancy  ;  the  difficulties  which 


*  Uebersicht  aller  bekannteo  Sprachen  and  ihrer  Dialekte.     8vo.    pp. 
xiv— 185.    St.  Pelertburgh,  1820. 


THE  INDIAN    LANGUAGES. 


73 


attend  the  pursuit  of  this  interesting  branch  of  science  ou^ht 
not  to  deter  us  from  still  pursuing  it,  in  hopes  of  discovering 
some  path,  that  may  lead  to  a  belter  knowledge  than  we  yet 
possess  of  the  origin,  history,  connexions,  and  relations,  of  the 
various  families  of  human  beings,  by  whom  this  globe  now  is 
and  formerly  was  inhabited."  * 


H 
PQ 

H 
> 

< 

o 


to 

JS 

a 
a 


s 
fe,S 


!^ 

o  *» 

a  u 
S  "^ 

£% 

•-I 

o  § 

§ 

en 


^ 


-'    •    H 

1    Zv^ 

§ 

^ 

V 

|3 

"l-ggo 

^  M  je 

• 

S 

•€ 

2 

L. 

•s 

a 

1       H 

1       ^ 
1       tq 

a,  « 

( > 

fes 

SLfa 

S 

s 

S. 

o 
a  >9! 

"■?    1 

^ 

>• 

-0. 

O    3 

S50 

0-       OJ 

• 

H 
O 

s 

cdSe 

0) 

S 

a 

IP 

So 

fa 

«« 

■li 

1 

ns 

ii 

« 

fa 

1 

f 

1' 

S 

^1 

1 

II 

fa* 

• 

fa 

fa    '§ 

1 

a 

• 

^0, 

<->>^ 

• 

o 

CO 

lis 

j; 

t. 

♦!-« 

OJ 

a  a 

Sas 

1 

u  a 

1^"^ 

-^  a 

?H2 


S       fa 


pp. 


Report  on  the  American  Languages ;  pp.  xxii.  and  xlvi. 


u 


tHE  INDIAN  LANGUAOE8. 


POSTSCRIPT. 


Since  the  preceding  Notes  were  written,  the  Rev.  Dr. 
Morse  has  published  his  Report  on  Indian  Affairs^  made  to  the 
Secretary  of  War,  and  comprising  "  a  Narrative  of  a  Tour 
performed  in  the  summer  of  1820  under  a  commission  from 
the  President  of  the  United  States,  for  the  purpose  of  ascer- 
taining, for  the  use  of  the  Government,  the  actual  state  of  the 
Indian  tribes  in  our  country."  This  important  publication 
contains  (among  other  things)  copious  geographical  details  of 
the  Indian  Nations,  which  would  nave  superseded  most  of  the 
remarks  upon  that  point  in  the  preceding  Notes.  The  Editor 
has  only  to  regret  it  was  not  sooner  laid  before  the  publick, 
and  that  it  is  now  too  late  for  him  to  avail  himself  of  it  with  a 
view  to  making  any  improvements  in  the  present  work.  He 
has,  however,  thought  it  would  be  acceptable  to  the  reader 
if  he  should  add  from  the  Rep6rt  (as  Dr.  Morse  has  obliging- 
ly permitted)  the  following  specimen  of  the  M ohegan  diciect, 
as  spoken  by  the  present  remnant  of  the  Stockbridge  tribe  : 


Translation  of  the  19th  Psalm  into  the  Muh-he-con^uk  Language, 
done  at  the  Cornwall  School,  under  the  superintendance  of  Rtv» 
John  Sergeant,  Missionary* 

1.  Neen  woh-we-koi-wau-con-nun 
wih-tom-mon-nau-woh  neh  week-chau- 
nauq-tho-wau>con  Poh-tom-now-waus ; 
don  neh  pau*muh-hom-mau-we-noi-eke 
wpon-nooth-ne-kaun  wnih«tau-nuh- 
kau-wau-con. 

2.  Woh-kom-maun  aup-to-naun,  don 
tpooh-quon  wau-wiht-no-waun  nooh- 
tom-mau-wau-con* 


3.  Stoh  nit-hoh  aup-to«nau*wau-con 
een-huh/  un-neekh'tho-wau-con  neh 
au-ton-nib  stoh  ptow-wau-mooq. 


1.  The  heavens  de- 
clare the  glory  of  God  ; 
aod  the  firmament  shew- 
eth  his  handy  work. 


2.  Day  unto  day  utter- 
eth  speech,  and  night  un- 
to night  sheweth  knowl- 
edge. 

3.  There  is  no  speech 
nor  language,  where 
their  voice  is  not  heard. 


THE  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


7^ 


4.  Wtoh-pih-haun*>woh  pkoch-chih 
au>so-khaun  mau-weh  pau-paum'h 
hkey-eke,  don  neen  wtaup-to-nau-wau- 
con*nO'Waun  pau-chih  wihq'h  hkey- 
eke.  Whuk-kau-wauk'wtuh-tow-waun 
we-ke-neet  neen  ke^eoo-khun^ 

5.  Nuk  nun  au-now  ne-mon*naWu 
tauq-peet  wauk  wpih-tow-we-kau- 
neek,  don  au-noin-me-naut  au>now  uh- 
wau-pau-weet  nee-mon-nawu  Mj-naut- 
wau-cbeh. 

6.  Nik  woh-wok  nun  wih-que>khuk 
woh-we*koi-wau-con<nuk,  don  neh 
wtin-ih  wcw-no-khaun  psih-kauch  aun- 
quih-quok :  don-stoh  iiit-huh  kau>qui 
kau-checkh-no-wih  nih  stop  au-pauth- 
mooq. 

7.  Neh  wton-koiTi-meek-tho-wau- 
con  Tau-paun-mo-wajt  kse-khau-yow, 
wquihe-n  p-puhg-tho-haun-quon  nuh 
wchucn-chuh-queen :  neh  wtaup-to- 
nau-wau-con  weet-nuth>theek  nuh  Tau- 
paun-mo-waut  wau-we-che-khun,  wih- 
wau-wau-tom-no-haun-quon  nuh  stoh 
Uau-qui  wau-wih-lauq. 

8.  Neen  wtun-kom-meek-tho-wau- 
con-nun.  Tau-paun-mo-waut-wneekh- 
nuh,  wtih-hon-nom-mih-hooq-nuh  nuh 
wtuh-heen :  neh  whok-koh-keet-wau 
con  Tau-paun-mo-waut  kse-khau-yow, 
wih-wau-po-haun-quon-nuh  neen 
wkees-que-nuh. 

9.  Qkhaun  Tau-paun-mo-waut  pe- 
nau-yow,  neen  o-neem-wau-wau-con- 
nun.  Tau-paun-rao-waut  wnau-mau- 
wau-con-no-won  wauk  conut-tuh  toht- 
que-wih. 

10.  Un-no-wewu  uh-hau-youn- 
quohk  neen  don  khow-wot,  quau,  don 
mkheh  wowh-nihk  khow-wot;  un-no- 
wew  sook-te-pook-luh  don  aum-wau- 
weh  soo-kut  quch-now-wih  neh  wse- 
khi. 


11 


4.  Their  line  is  gone 
out  through  all  the  earth, 
and  their  words  to  the 
end  of  the  world.  In 
them  hath  he  set  a  tab^ 
ernacle  for  the  sun, 

6.  Which  is  as  a 
bridegroom  coming  out 
of  hi?  chamber,  and  re- 
joiceth  as  a  strong  man 
to  run  a  race. 

6.  His  goine  forth  is 
from  the  end  of  the 
heaven,  and  his  circuit 
unto  the  ends  of  it ;  and 
there  is  nothing  hid  from 
the  heat  thereof. 

7.  The  law  of  the 
Lord  is  perfect,  convert- 
ing the  soul :  the  testi- 
mony of  the  Lord  is 
<«ure,  making  wise  the 
simple. 


8.  The  statutes  of  the 
Lord  are  right,  rejoicing 
the  heart :  the  com- 
mandment of  the  Lord 
is  pure,  enlightening  the 
eyes. 

)).  The  fear  of  the 
Lord  is  clean,  enduring 
forever  :  the  judgments 
of  the  Lord  are  true,  and 
righteous  altogether. 

10.  More  to  be  desir- 
ed are  they  than  gold, 
yea,  than  much  fine 
eold  ;  sweeter  also  than 
honey,  and  the  honey- 
comb. 


n 


THE   INDIAN   LAN43UAOES. 


11.  Wonk*nuh-hun,  neen  wewh* 
chih  kton-nuh-kaM<on  eh-honi'inautn- 
quoth  thcen  ;  don  koh-khon-now<wau- 
tau-thow  neen  htawu  mau-khauk  hpon> 
noon-to-wau-con. 

19.  Ow-\vaun  aum  wke-sib  nooh- 
tom-n]on>nuh  wpon-non-nuh-kaU'Wau- 
con-nun?  kse-khih-eh  kry-oh  nch 
wchih  nke-mih  mbon<nun-nub-kau- 
wau-con-nih-kok?. 

13.  Kaun-nuh  kton-nuh-kau-con 
wonk  nch  wchib  maum-checn-wih-nau- 
kih  mchoi-wan*c.on-iiih-koke  ;  ohecn 
un-nauu-tom-hun  neen  wauch  aum  un- 
nowh-kau-quoh :  nun  katich  ney-oh 
no-noi,  wauk  chih  n'nkus-see*khoi  neh 
wchih  mau-khauk  mchoi-wau-con-nuk. 

14.  Un-naun-toh  neen  ndaup-to-nau- 
wau-con-nun  don  neh  oi-nih  pnow- 
waun*tok  nduh,  wauch  autn  wow-we- 
kih-nau-yon,  O  Tau-paun-me-yon, 
dtih-waU'paw«con  wonk  Pohp-quaukh- 
kon-neet. 


11.  Moreover,  by 
ihem  58  thy  servant 
warned  ;  and  in  keeping 
of  them  there  is  great 
reward. 

12.  Who  can  under- 
stand his  errors  ?  cleanse 
thou  me  from  secret 
faults. 

13.  Keep  back  thy 
servant  also  from  pre- 
sumptuous sins ;  let 
them  not  have  dominion 
over  me  :  Then  shall  I 
be  upright,  and  I  shall 
be  innocent  from  the 
great  transgression. 

1 4.  Let  the  words  of 
my  mouth,  and  the  med- 
itation of  my  heart,  be 
acceptable  in  thy  sight, 
O  Lord,  my  strength 
and  my  Redeemer. 


J 
J 

J 

I 

I 


: 


I 


K 
K 


K 
K 
K 


THE  INDIAN    LANGUAGES. 


n 


I.    INDEX    or  MOHEOAN  AND  OTHER  INDIAN  WORDS,  EX- 
PLAINED IN  KDWARDS'  OBSERVATIONS. 


thy 


0;^  The  referenoei  in  this  Index    to  Dr.  Edwards*  work  ut  made  to 
the  original  paging,  which  is  preserved  in  the  margin  of  the  prtMDt 

edition. 

Chiv,  denotes  Chir>p«'way  words  i 
Jlfo^.  — —  iMonawlc  ;  and 
Shaw.  — — —  Shawaneie. 


The  worda  not  thus  designated  are  all  Moktgan. 


Page 
Amaquah,  a  beaver  (^Shaw.)      6 
Amik,  a  beaver  {Chip.) 
Amisque,  a  beaver 
Annen,  to 
Auuweeweh,  more 


7 

6 

15 

12 


C. 

Chautok,  seven  {Moh.) 


G. 


Ghusooh,  eiglit 


N. 


Ilkeesque,  eye 
Hpoon,  winter 


a: 


Kahnuh,  very  12 

Keah,  thou  7, 16 

Kelah,  thou  (Shaw.)  7 

Keauwuh,  ye  7 

Kelauweh,ye  (Shaw.)  7 

Keesogh,  tlie  sun  8 

Kialeh.  foul-  (Moh.)  9 

Kissis,  the  sun  (Chip.)  8 

Kmattanissauteuhk  you  are  a 

coward  14 

Kmeetseh,  thou  eatest  15 

Knisk,  thy  hand  17 

Kogh,  thy  father  13 

Kpeesquasooeh,  you  are  a  girl  14 
Kpehtuhquisseh,  thou  art  tall  1 1 
Kpehtuhquissehmuhiyearetall  11 


Page 

n 
11 

14 


Kpumseh,  thou  walkett 
Kpuinsehmuh,  ye  walk 
Ktuhwhunin,  I  love  thee 
Ktuhwhunoohmuh,  I  love  you 

(plur.)  14 

Ktumhecan,  thy  hatchet  1i 
Ktumherannoowuh,  your 

hatchet  13 

M. 

Mackwah,  a  bear  {Chip.)  7 
-  Malatat, good  tor  naught  (CAip.)  8 
Manitou,  a  spirit  or  spectre, 

{Chip.)  7 
Mannito,  a  spirit  or  spectre. 

devil  7 

Matansautee,  a  coward  14 

Mattipeh,  sit  down  8 

Maukissin,  a  uhoe  {Chip.)  8 

Mauouah,  a  bear  {ahaw.)  6- 
Mawfawtissie,  an  impostor,  he 

is  a  bad  man  {Chip.)  7 

Meenuh,  give  it  him  7 

Meetseh,  eat  thou  15- 

MeetHoo,  he  eateth  15 

Metooque,  wood  8 

Millaw,  giv»  it  iiim  {Chip.)  7 

Mintipin,  sit  «<oivn  {Chip.)  8 

Mittic,  wood  (Chip)  8 

Mkissin,  it  uh-ii  8 

Mquoh,  a  bear  7 

Mtandou  or  mannito,  devil  7 

Mtannit,  ten  9 
Mtissoo,  an  impostor,  he  is  an 

impostor  or  bad  man  7 


n 


THK   INDIAN    LANOUAOIS. 


Mtiuoo,  he  ii  homel  r  1 1 

Mtit,  good  for  naught  8 

JV. 

Naugheea,  mj  grandchild  6 

Nauoeeweh,  nine  9 

Kauwoh,  four  0 

Nbej,  water  8 

"Shoo  or  nepoo  ;  dead,  or  he  is 

dead  7 

Ndinnehnuh,  I  run  to  19 

Ndinnoghoh,  I  walk  to  15 

Ndiotuwauch  wupkoh,  I  shall 

light  to-morrow  15 

l^dwhpeh,  I  ride  15 

Nduhwhuntamihin,  I  love  it  14 
Mduhwhunuiik,  I  love  them  14 
Ndumhecan^  mj  hatchet  12 

Kdumhecannuh,  our  hatrhet  13 
I^duwhunuw,  I  love  him  or 

her 
Neah,  I  (pronoun) 
Nebbi.  water  (Chtp.) 
Neaunuh,  we 
Tl'^auweh    (Shaw.)     See 

iyneeweh. 
Net  uoh,  two 
Necpoo ;   dead,  he  is  dead 

(Chip) 
Nelah,  I  (pronoun)  (Shaw.) 
Nelauweh,  we  (Shaw) 
Nemannauw,  a  man 
Nemannauk,  (p^ur.}  men 
Memannauwoo,  he  is  a  man 
Nemeetseh:  See  Nmeetseh 
Nemeethau,  elder  sister  (Shaw.)  7 
Nemo^home,  my  grandfather  6 
Nepoo  t^  nboo ;  dead,  he  is 

aead  7 

Neeseethau,  my  uncle  (Shaw.)  7 
Netohoon,  an  elder  brother  11 
Ngheesum,  a  younger  brother 

or  sister  11 

Ngwittob,  one  9 

Ngwittus,  six  9 

Nip ;  to  die,  I  die  7 

Nippee.  water  (Shaw.)  7 

Nmase,  en  elder  sitter  11 

Nniees,  eld^r  sister  7 


14,16 

16 

8 

7 


7 

7 

7 

10 

10 

13 


Nmeetseh 
eat 


«n'.eets«h,   I 

15,16 


Nmeetsehnuh,  we  eat  16 

Nnisk,  my  hand  If 

Nochehtiuli,  I  run  from  15 

Nttcumthau,  my  grandmother 

(Shnw )  6 

NouHth4>thau,  my  grandchild 

(Shaw.)  6 

Nogh,  my  father  10 

Noghoh,  three  9 

Nohhum,  my  grandmother  6 
Notoghogh,  I  walk  from  15 

MpehtuhquixAch,  I  am  tall  11 
Npehtuhquistiehnuh,    wo  are 

tall  11 

Npumseh,  I  walk  11 

Npunisehnuh,  we  walk  11 

Nsuse,  an  uncle  by  the  mo- 

thei^  side  1 1 

Nsconmoo,  he  is  malicious  11 
Nscunmowukon,  malice  16 

Nsees,  my  uncle  7 

Nuchehque,  an  uncle  by  the 

father's  side  1 1 

Nunon,  five  9 

Ocheh,  from  15 

Ohs,  three  (Moh.)  9 

Oieet,  the  man  who  lives  or 

dwells  in  a  place  12 

Oioteet,  the  man  who  iighta  12 
Otaheh,  his  heart  (Shaw.)         7 

P. 

Paumse-an,  thou  walking  12 
Paumseauk,  we  walkin<;  12 

Paumseauque,  ye  walkine  12 
Paumseecheek  ( they  walking, 

they  who  walk  12 

Paumseet,  the  man  who  walks  12 
Paumseet,  he  walking  12 

Paumse-uh,  I  walking  12 

Pautoh,  fetch  6 

Peatoloo,  fetch  (Shaw.)  6 

Peesquasoo,  girl  6, 14 

Pehtuhquisseecheek,   the  tall 

men       •  12 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAGM. 


79 


5,16 
16 
\7 
15 


6 

13 

» 

« 

15 

11 

11 
11 
11 

11 

11 

16 

7 

I 
11 
9 


15 
9 

12 
12 

7 


12 

Id 

'  12 
Lb  12 
12 
12 
6 
6 
6,14 
|«U 
IS 


Pehtuhquiiteet,  the  man  who 

it  tall  11 

Pehtuliquiaflon,  he  in  tall  1 1 

PehtuhquittHoouk,  thejr  are  tall  1 1 
Pcnumpaimoo,  a  boy  10 

Pep«un,  winter  (Cnip.)  8 

Peyulitummauwukon,  religion  16 
PiinmnufiHie,  g<»(r7it|>)  8 

Pomthalu,  he  gues  (MA(iu>.)  6 

Poutouwali ;  dress  the  kettle, 

make  a  ftre  7 

Poutwah,   drcM   the    kettle, 

«tc.  (Ckip.)  7 

Pumiggeh ;  go,  walk  thou      8, 17 
PumiHsoo,  he  goes  6, 1 1 

Pumissoouk,  they  walk  1 1 


Scutta,fire  (,Chip.)  7 
Sekeenundowhukon,  hatred       1 6 

Sepoo,  river  7 

Sippim,  river  {Chip.)  8 

Skeesacoo,  eye  (Shaw.)  6 

Suttaeo,  eight  (>/oA.)  9 
Squatliauthau,agirl,  (SAato.)      6 

Btauw,  fire  7 

T. 

Tah,  where  (Chip.)  8 

Tawn^,  how  {Chtv.)  7 

Tejtgcneh,  two  {Moh.)  9 

Tehah,  where  8 

Teuhtoh,  nine  {Moh.)  9 

Thepee,  river  (Shaw.)  7 
Tmohhecan,  hatchet  or  axe      12 

Towacah,  ear  {Shaw.)  7 

Towohque,  ear  6 

Tuneh,  how  7 

Tupouwus,  seven  9 

U, 

Uhwhundowukon  {noun)  love  16 

Ukeesquan,  his  eyes  7 

Unisk,  his  hand  17 

Uskot.one  (.Moh.)  9 

Utoh,  his  heart  7 

Utumhecan,  his  hatchet  12 


Utumhecannoowuh,  their 

hatchet  IS 

Uwoh  ;  he,  that  man,  this  man, 
tltis  thing  6. 16 

W. 

Waoecheh,  her   husband 

{Shaw.)  7 

Waughecheh,  her  husband  7 
Waunseet,  the  man  who  is 

beautiful  12 

Weecuah,  house  (Shaw.)  6 

Weekuwuhm,  house  6 

Weenseh,  his  head  {Shaw.)  6 

Weensis,  his  head  6 
Weeseh  :  See  weenseh 

Weeween,  marry  8 

Weewin,  marry  {Chip.)  8 

Weghaukun,  hair  7 
Welah,  he,  that  man,  {Shaw.)  6 

Welathoh.hair  {Shaw.)  7 
Wepeetalee,  his  teeth  {Shaw.)  7 

Wepeeton,  his  teeth  7 

Wialeh,  ten  {Moh.)  9 

Wigwaum,  house  {Chip.)  7 

Wisk.  five  (Moh.)  9 

Wiskinkhie,  his  eyes  {Chip.)  7 

Wnechun,  his  child  10 

Wneeweh,  I  thank  you  7 
Wnissoo,  he  is  beautiful  11,12 
Wnoghquetookoke,  Stock- 

bridse  15 
Wnoffnquetookoke  ndinne- 
to^npeh,  I  ride  to  Stock- 
bridge  15 

— —  noche- 

toghpeh,    I    ride    from 
Stockbridge  15 
Wnukuwoh  ndiotuwoh,  yes- 
terday I  fight  15 

'    '  ndiotuwohpoh, 
yesterday  I  fought  15 
Wupkauch    ndiotuwoh,   to- 
morrow I  fight  Iff 

F, 

Yoiyok,  six  {M>h.)  9 


80 


THE  INDIAN   LANGUAGES. 


II.    INDEX  OF   THE  PRINCIPAL   MATTERS   IN  EDWARDS'  OB- 
SERVATIONS AND  THE  EDITOR'S  NOTES. 


Q:^  Thb  refcrencea  to  Dr.  Edwardi'  work  are  made  to  the  original  paging^ 
which  is  preserved  in  the  margin  of  the  present  edition.  The  other  refe- 
rences (distinguished  by  the  letter  N)  are  to  the  number*  of  the  Editor'* 
Notes. 


A. 

Page 

Abstract  terms ;  as  common  in  the 
Mohegan  as  in  other  languages    16 
and  N.  12 

n  formed  in  the  De- 

laware by  t)ie  termination  wa- 
gon t6. 

.  in  the  South  Ame- 

rican languages  j^.  12 

Adjectives,  none  in  Mohegan         1 1 

..   .    ,  few  in  the  Delaw.     N.  ? 

■I  mode  of  expressing  cle- 

grees  of  comparison  ib. 

— —  their  place  supplied  by 
verbs  ib. 

Affixes,  used  to  express  the  pro- 
nouns 12 

I .  manner  of  using  them         14 

— —  analogy  of  Hebrew  and 
Mohegan  16 

Algonkins  speak  a  dialect  of  Mo- 
hegan 5 

Aopellatives  {father,  mother,  &c.) 
rever  used  in  Mohegan  without 
a  proaookinal  affix  13 


Cases,  only  one  in  Mohegan  which 
varies  from  th/e  nominative  10 

-^ in  the  Massachusetts  lang.  N.  4 

I  nouis  in  the  Mexican  lang.    ib. 

— —  seven  in  the  Quichnan  ib. 

Cherokee,  specimen  of  verbs  in,  N.  14 
Chili,  the  language  has  a  singular 
^.dual  and  plural  number  N.  6 

^ippewav  language,  radically  the 

same  with  the  Mohegan  5 

.  —  specimen  of     7 

Comparison  of  atyective^  12 


D. 

Fag* 
Daggett  (Rev.  H.)  his  remarks  on 
the  modes  of  expressing  the  re- 
lations o(  father,  mother,  tic. 
in  various  dialects  N.  8 

Declensions,  none  in  Delaware    N.  4 
Delaware  language,  radically  the 

same  with  the  Mohegan  5 

—r- the  most  widely  extend- 
ed of  any  language,  east  of  the  • 
Missisippi.     See  Introduction  to 
^otee. 

Indians,  where  situated, 

&:c.  N.  15 

Dual  number,  in  some  American 
languages  N.  & 


Father,  Mother,  &c.  not  used  witli- 
out  the  pronominal  affixes,  my, 
thy,  &c.  13 

and  N.  8 
Future  tense,  expressed  by  affixing 
the  sign  of  it  to  the  adverb,  ice. 
which  acconpanics  the  verb        15 
and  N.  1 1 

O. 

Genders,  no  diversity  i>f  in  Mo- 
hegan 10 

in  the  Massachusetts  and 

Delaware  N.  3 

in  Delaware,  iu  the  case 

of  certain  animals,  expressed  by 
a  distinct  word  ib. 

Guaranese  language  was  only  a 
singular  number  Nt  S 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAOt». 


81 


jr. 

Hebrew,  its  analog;  in  lome  re- 
ipects  to  the  Mohegan  12,  16 

Hurons  and  Iroquois  cannot  pro- 
nounce the  labials  N.  2 


/. 


Iroquois :    See  Hurons. 
Infinitive  mode,  never  used  in  Mo* 

began  13 

Inflexions  of  nouns,  none  in  the 
Mexican  or  Orinokese  languages 

N.  4 
K. 


Killistenoes :    See  Knisteneaux. 

Knisteneaux  speak  a  dialect  radi- 
cally the  same  with  the  Mohegan 
See  also  Note*. 

•  •  where  situated,  be,  N. 


1& 


In 


Labials,  abound  in  Mohegan  f  !•' 
'■  none  in  Mohawk  ib. 

■  remark  of  La  Hontan  re- 

specting  N.  2 

La  Hontan,  his  acquaintance  with 

the  Indian  languages  denied  bjr 

Charlevoix  N.  15 

Lenni  Lenape,  the  true  name  of 

the  Delawares  ib. 

Lord's  Prayer :    See  Pater  Noster. 


15 


Mahicanni,  the  true  name  of  the 
Mohegans  N. 

Massachusetts  language,  radically 
the  same  with  the  Mohegan  5 

■   Indians,  their  situ- 
ation, &c.  N.  15 
Menomoneea  5 

— — —  where  situated,  &c.  N.  15 

Messisaugas  or  Messisaugers  5 

where  situated,  &c.  N.  15 

Mexican  language  has  no  inflex- 
ions of  nouns,  except  for  the 
singular  and  plural  N.  4 

Minsi  or  Munsee,  radically  the 

same  with  the  Mohegan 
-  numerals  N. 

Mohawk,  entirely  different  frcm 
Mohegan 


specimen  of 


ib. 


Mohawk,  has  no  labials  9 

— — — —  numerals  ib. 

and  N.  1 

Mohegan,  dialects  of  H  spoken 
throughout  New  England  5 

various  dialects  euume- 

rated  ib. 

— — has  eight  parts  of  speech  15 

— — ^—  radically  the  same  with 
the  language  of  Eliot's  Bible        5 

Lord's  Prayer  in  it  9 

its  resemblance  to  He- 
brew in  the  affixes  12,  16 

— — —  Indians,  various  names 
of  N.  1& 

Muhhekanneew :    See  Mohegan. 

Munstes :    See  Minsi. 

JV. 

Nanticokes,  or 

Nanticooks  5 

where  situated,  Sec.  N.  IS 

Natick  language,  properly  called 

the  Maitachuietln  ib, 

Nipegons  5 

— — —  the  same  with  the  Win- 

nebagoes  N.  15 

———  where  situated,  &c.         ib. 
Nouns  may  be  turned  into  verbs 
in  the  Indian  languages  14 

and  N.  10 
Numbers  (of  nouns,  &c  )  their  va- 
riety in  the  American  languages 

N.  5 
Numerals,  in  Mohegan  &  Mohawk    9 
—— —  how  far  they  may  be 
used  to  ascertaia  affinities  of  di- 
alects N.  1 

O. 

Orinokese  languages  have  no  in- 
flexions of  nouns  N.  4 

do  not  apply  the  plural 

number  to  irrational  animals     N.  6 
Orthography   of  the  Indian  lan- 
guages, example  of  the  differ- 
ences occasioned  by  its  unset- 
tled state  N.  1 
Ottowaus,  nure  properly  Wtawas    5 

where  situat-d,  &c.  N.  15 

Ottogamies  5 

■-■  -'     ■  where  situated,  kc,  N.  15 


99 


THE  INDIAN  LANOUAOE& 


F. 

Panons  (Gen.)  his  list  of  Shawa- 

nese  words  6 

Participles,  all  Mohegan  verbs  hare 

thorn  11 

——>———  are  declined,  as  verbs 

are  12 

Pater  Noster,  in  Mohegan  9 

I  in  Mohawk  ib. 

See  also  JVb/e  1 

■         how  far  translations 


of  it  may  be  used,  to  prove  affi- 
nities  of  dialects  N.  1 

Penobscot  language,  radically  the 
same  with  the  Mohegan  6 

Peruvian  language :  See  Quichuan. 

Plural  number,  how  formed  in  Mo- 
hegan 10 

—— — ^— —  of  the  American 
languages,  various  forms  of    N.  5 

Prefixes :   See  Affixes. 

Prepositions,  very  few  in  Mohegan  15 

— rarely  used  except  in 

composition  ib. 

Pronouns,  prefixed  and  suffixed  to 
nouns  and  verbs  13 


Q. 


Quichuan,  or  Peruvian,  language 
has  seven  cases  of  nouns  N.  4 

R. 

lUle^s  MS.  Dictionary  of  the  Ab- 
naki  N.  15 

Relations  (of father,  mother.  Sic.) 
more  carefully  distinguished  by 
the  Mohegans  than  by  Euro- 
peans 1 1 

— — ^—  remarks  on  the  Indian 
n^ode  of  using  nouns  expressing 
these  relations  N.  8 

Relative  pronouns  who  and  which 
wanting  in  Mohegan  12 

■  ■         sUbu  wanting  in 
tome  languages  of  S.  America,  N.  6 


S. 


Saukies 


where  situated,  &c. 


5 

N.  15 


Shawanese,    radically    the    same 

with  the  Mohegan  5 

— — — ^  specimen  of  6 


Specific  terms,  more  used  thaa 
generic  ones  N.  14 

St.  Francis  Indians,  dialect  of  Mo- 
hegan 6 

1  where  situat- 
ed N.  15 

Stockbridge  dialect,  the  one  which 
is  the  subject  of  Edwards*  work    5 

Suffixes :  See  Affixes. 

T. 

Tenses,  past  and  future  used  l5 

past  and  future  expressed 

by  a  form  of  the  present  ib, 

expressed  sometimes  by 

variations  of  the  noun  or  adverb 
accompanying  the  verb  ibi 

and  N.  It 
U. 


Unumi  numerals 


N.  1 


F. 


Verb  substantive,  wanting  in  Mo- 
hegan and  many  other  Indian 
languages  14 

and  N.  9 

— —  transitive,  never  used  with- 
out expressing  both  agent  and 
object  13 

Verbs,  the  nominative  and  accusa- 
tive pronouns  always  affixed  to 
them  14 

their  radix  is  the  third  per- 
son sing,  indie.  15 

formed  out  of  nouns  14 

and  N.  10 

how  used  in  the  American 

languages  in  speaking  of  differ- 
ent objects  N.  14 

Vocabularies  of  Indian  languages, 
caution  to  be  used  iu  forming 
them  17 

and  N.  14 

Wagan,  a  Delaware  termination 
for  abstract  terms ;  correspond- 
ing to  -net*  in  English,  Sc  -heit 
or  -keit  in  German  N.  1 2 

Winnebagoes  5 

Woagan,  the  tame  as  wagan      N.  12 
WHawas  (or  Ottowaus)  5 


N.  1 


VOCABULARIES 


ov 


FOR  the  accuracy  of  the  words  in  the  following  Vocabularies  we 
have  to  rely  upon  the  knowledge  of  the  Indians  or  interpreters  from 
whom  we  received  them,  having  carefully  noted  them  down  on  the 
spot,  as  they  appeared  to  be  pronounced.  I  have  much  pleasure  in 
acknowledging  the  ready  and  important  aid  which  I  received  from 
Mr.  John  Dougherty,  at  present  Deputy  Indian  Agent  for  the  Mis- 
souri ;  indeed,  the  Omawhaw,  Shoshone  and  Upsaroka  vocabularies 
are  chiefly  set  down  agreeably  to  his  pronunciation. 

The  philolo^st  will  observe,  that  in  these  vocabularies,  the  guttu- 
ral sound  is  indicated  by  a  t,  a  nasal  sound  by  an  *,  and  a  \  accom- 
panying the  letter  j,  shows  that  the  Fr  .i,.-b  sound  of  that  letter  must 

be  given  to  it. 

T.  SAY. 


nation 
ipond- 
heit 
N.  12 
5 
N.  12 
5 


VoL.n. 


K 


(  l»x  ) 


a. 


C 

P 

o 

p 
n 

<! 

o 


^ 

A 


-3 


> 
-O 

a 
I 

e 


s 

-D 

0 


*  «  a3 

-1.  S  = 


-O  ■S 


a     j- 


"fD 


O  <j  "3  "i 


s 

en 


;Wi 


<i '^   fj  ^ -^  ■xA  M  M  ^ -^'^       MJA-O 


■o  -3 


'     s 

■«!    B 


to  ^S 


en 


<c5 


=«  tS  "2  "^  '«'  « 


t 


v 


ORi 


a; 


A    > 


o 


"Si  E 


Ml 

c 


•V  a3 

IS  £1° 

'3  go 


-rt 


o 


j3 

a 


-4j  "U    T"  t 
-V    B-<4  •<« 


p«^   etS   c0   cfl 


-^ 


««rt  «rt 


^=9 


IB 

^  s  -♦t'  «<g  '^  ri 


I 

o 

EC 


en 

S 

CI] 

<n 


^■UJ="g 


o.  (LcS  d.„S£ 


* . 


-5% 


■^ 


:5 


o 


t<ti  wcti 


-C  ^  ^  J2  ,£   -a       I       r" 


■5 


-3 


•u  ijc-u  -•?  j=  :s 


si    re    IS  ^     •     S:    a»J  2i    r*  J—  r<tf 


j3 
»U  ...4) 

W  "en   en 


■? 

Xli 


1 


c 

2  bc 

Yanc 
Lan 

% 

-0 

1- 

^-"^ 

0  J-     -If 

*§ 

•^-d 

Sioux, 
band 

-u 

"B  -u  0 

3:2 -s  "8.12 

«« 

cua-4^  --u^  &.S  0 

4> 

.e 

M 

a 


0) 


O) 


"O  "O  .»» 
*  ■*  -Itj 

s  c. 


i  <f  e 


«xi 


12 


Wirt  "*:i  "■■^ 


o 


c   >  J. 


50  .r-   S   Si   a)   en 
4>   » 


« 


j2 


2 

fc^    ^    cC    ^ 
CC-<iXiEb 


rf 
^ 


<« 

f 

-^ 

X 

Jt 

J 

JS 

m 

M 

<«i 

-a 

i) 

* 

1 

,^ 

1 

CO 

CI 

, 

-? 

i 

-i 

-*? 

^ 

-fiS 

t 

•*L 

iC 

Jjil 

1 

-eij 

JS 

1 

:« 

i  6 

3    V 

•>  o 

-  u 

3    6«1 

"3  fee 

i.<!j 

-^  JS 

" 

•« 

"^    3    S    tp 


(    l«i    ) 


a 


:§     I     ^ 

-W    d  rg  "3  ;2 
-O  >M  "O  ^  J3 


I 


:g 

> 

M 

J3 

•? 

1^ 

.M 

-e« 

«« 

-sf 

•o 


a. 

J3 


jrt  -1.  -=  -fi 

•f?  "2i   on   as 


•9 

u 
w 


I 


-4>  -Stf 


^"S^3 


CO 


»    o 

-1)  -u    - 


en 

-V 


1* 


<» 


I  1-1 


^ 


"^  -i  -u  -u 

^  -i  .s;  .-a 


w     ;g  J-  -u 

^  -3  j=  ^    ■:•    a 


-WO    en    U-U    C-U-<3 


s 


lea 
S 


e 

-i 


tSr        i 


a 

s4^ 


^' 


-ctf 


■c  j:  -u  -u 
^  u  u  u 


I 

^  -ca 


:S 


o  -c  •o  =<a  "2  -i^ 


CJ    X 


a 


«« 


.<a 

I 

o 


•  -t> 

^  "^  -u 
•<«  -^  j^ 

-r-  -?»  -o 


I 


I 


V 

I 


O  ■♦-•-(«    «) 


S  .:7^  IS  &  a 


ic-caS 


>^-ea  "U   bH-V  -o 
•  ^  a       c  a 


JS  irt  "OT    58  ,o 

2  J  is  ^  fl 


-ca 
■<a  e 


xa 
bfl 

bO 
<t  '•rT» 

*<a  fl 

u  s 


-cb 

1 

KB 


I 

I 


-S  jS 


:5 

,-a 


-ca  -ca , 

JS  ^  -l>  o 
in   CO   X   oD 


-ca 

&o 

a 
rtca 

CD 


-A  9*j:j= 
■^  >  a  >  js 


3 


if 

tn 
I 

■  <o 

C3 


O 

Ka 


a 

■ 

-O 


to 

I 


,1? 


-ca 

bO 

=«  -<a  -«' 


aj  « 

c3 


-T  ■<a  ^  o 
^  -ca    '  t<a  >■  "2  > 


0) 

3 


-ca 


c^ 


-ca  j2 

-ca  -ca 


-ca 


■ca 


-eS. 

ijfc^a  -ca  i"  iic 

c  ^  ^  .2  c 

-S  «a  ^  ^  "V 
T,J.    '  ■<;«  a 

"2  3  "ca  «a  j- 

>  e  s  c  u 


•el 


"S 

4a  S 
is 


a 
-ca 


S 


a 
ca 


iC 


rf 


S  2  g       e-S-^  S  3  g  S  3  ^"     -=3      -^5:5  = 


«  -C    O    O  O    4)    3 


^Hi*H    yp:>'^«pi;pQ»;5^    oS    ot.>o»    ^^    ^ 


;^  ^     P^  ,5  ii  ;5  ^ 


o 
--I 


•a 

0 

I 

I 

i 

I 
I 

1 

u 

-o 


1 

-o 
a 


a 

"S 

r 

1 


*tCv 


rrt 


!1> 


(   haxi    ) 


25j 


^ 


111 


t^  tiiD 


0 


Ho 


-^1 

;55 


1 


<i      «« 


I  ••1) 

■i     "?     "2 


.p        T 

a,    xu 


T 


:! 


•o 
B 


V 

s 


OB 

on"V 


& 


5-  o"**^ 


ft- — I    .^ 


■?  I 


I 


■f-t. 

-0-0 


<<lt 


V 

-If 


TS" 


<j2 

be>». 

o 


£3  ^ 


■? 

0 
-T 

-5 


— 1 — 

•302 


I ' 


i 


•«* 


u 


-        «fi        -D        -O  "O 


o 
-o 


-u 


1 


0 
OS 


^3 

SSl  •"^^  'O 


I 


bl) 


f^ 


^       ^ 


xK 


-U 


uus 


cc     cc 


2 


^ 


<> 


> 


a 


uo 


-g 


V 


-OJ 


V 


-ttf^ 


s-«ra     M   3 

t->  eu  m.       0       -ri 


-ct 


P-cu 


bf)       tad 
e       0 

§  u  § 


V    4) 


<U 


«rt  ^ 


-O-aP 


•<« 


-a 


u  V 


ed   u 
S   W  <i> 


-^^^f     "9-3  V 


•>  ^   M  b   6C.2  -S  ' 


S?*  t-   T"        ■!„  Ml  0   0        -«        ^  L,   M  is   b»)'»  "t^   V    [».  a   «> 
o«>2f      a2-0"0^T        a  9i  JX  .  JS  .     flj-«30 


-rt  ^ 


"« 


^ 


0-0 


SP    ti>>    2 


Jr  ^  '*-' 


•o   u  "P 


ir-i 


?-=  2 


■c-0 


•V 


-V 


-ii 


Si 


CO 


fi^o 


•a       o 


Q      p,U)      U      PQ 


CO 


1 

(5 


(   Izxiii   ) 


I 


? 


:3 


mm 


i 


•«{  & 

"2  -ti 
^?  g 

— I — 

CI  S 

^  a- 


(A  T  .a  a 


i1 

9-S 


33  _« 


43 


S  S' 


bO 

9 

t 


;■ 


i 


i 


^    O    S,    ^jj 


I    to 


52       at 


1 


s 


-O   on   B   9   U   ^ 


-rt. 


«-c? 


I' 


V  <» 
>  d 
o 

b 

a 

V 
bio  00 

a     -5 


3  ^  a 

i  o  S 


I 

a 


a  _(-  ^  <p 


s  5  w  o< 


a 


bftS  tH  J,  S  to 


I  3^ 

fl  -t)  «ca  SS 
S  d  e-d 


1^^ 


u 


o 


d  «   « 

o      -^ 


;5 


T     d 


■■  d 


T     E3 


d-6 


to 

J3 


.o 


d 

d 


d 


S  d  '-' 


a.d  a. 


;3a'2l^ 

^    i    J.     ' 

-o  "^  "5  -^ 


I    i 


g" 


«•«  a  g     na 


t-   .    bfl 
d>  *^  o 


Q 

S 

o 

P 

u 

o 


1 


1 


B 

e 

a 


c 
d 

T 

a 

i 


■<i 


u 


1^ 


(    Ixxiv    ) 


^ 


<t  a 

^►3 


•a 

■4* 


1 

-91 


3     ,fl 

vrt  <«(  ^ 


It 


2 

-C-Q 


.    Ill 


I 


5 


I  2  g 


i 


1^ 
.11 

CO 


So     5p 

><4       ^  -C 


it 


i  111 


t1 


-a 


^»  '•?  * 

e.  u  u  o 


I 


An2 


I 

a 

"O 


.d  a 


a 

"9 

a 


a  £ 


e  a.a 


1 


3 


e 


c 


bO 

c 


•«1 


X'  .,',  'flt 


«n 


t^tl 


bC 


a 


-«J  •T' 


bO 


-Cd   e<d  Ktf 

Cue  c 


X  bC 

-l.s 


^>«l 


=  .2 
.  _  o  « 


bOC 


I       I 


u  a< 


^^:|:5^ 


U    «l  ,jC 


■C  »  E  oj  a  «s        M 


V 


is 


a    j?^    S    I^^^SS    £^H    il^s£ 


f 


(    Ixxv    ) 


5  i 


■3      >      "2:5 


:a 


-rt 


^    i 


2 


-u 


3  «-S 


-u 


2S         "SL    22 


JSiS 


-u 


T        -v 


?t  Hill"  :|    s^,f5 


-s  ►. 


-3 
1 

-w 


si      I        1 


•«««« 


« 


at  a 
-etf 


S     .tJ 


n 

■2     .-S't2 


I 


■nt 


tt 


^3 


Ktt 


bO 


s 


•a. 


-a» 


i 


'T-.Bl 


O 


•<$ 


:3    1! 


k4 


•<« 


-T  «)  tJD  M)  W)  we     -f 

™0  •'0  -O  "O  '2  O    5    O         iR    » 


a  </ 


Ktf 


•«< 


i 


«4 


At 


•< 


=rt 


«o 


•«! 


-o 


a  c 


ijC 


bp 


'.3      .2  ja 


'^^t' 


-o 


a     o 


-a> 


M  bAjS  ^ 
en        <K  t/i 


f  ^-^ 


to 


1  •«»  -^       .A        T 

a  >  fee     *.      -o 


■■«?    12     -5     -9  5P53-?^-2 


MJ      "- 


J-^^ 


O 


S  is 


-g-a 


CO  d 


13  T 

1    -4> 


■O  jC 


■  «Q 


bO 
B 


-BJ 


rt'T» 


I 


•nl   a^j 


^ 


-eS 


5  5  a 

^"bD„ 


C    O 


-fl» 


,M 


bfl 


c^-S 


Id 


£g 


=  3-c 


-Bl 


-s  a 


a-<«Q^bO       bObfi       bfi       bfieebO 


I  be  • 


^  a  1$  cT  a 


a  a 


a  4)  a 


-l)«rt 


a   u   9'-0        «c4 


e  &  s2 


-3 
«  2 

CS   o 


be 


bfl 


V 


.^        "r! 


.S     '-3 


0^ 


k    tf   (^  o   v;^ 


I 


'« 


v 


"^    gl- 


h  «rt  y 


s> 


f»,fflHi>m    e 


1 

I 

1.5 


i£ 


o 


f 


25 


(    Uxvi    )     fif 


^ 


i 


<al 


1 


fl 


li 


Sd 


II 


CO 


3 

I 


3*        2 


^ 

tL 


e 


ti 


ta-u  T 

I3l      s2 


I 


^1 


3 


•at 
V 


.si 


bO 

I 

-o 


«4 
-O 


i 


■ 

-I* 

a 


St: 


V-'W/ 


■^ 


:§ 


I 


I 


3 


Ml  "« 

«    <u  -Si. 


-o 

a 


•4)  T  ^    • -o 


S 


H     pqQ     ;>«     pM 


& 


^i5 


S   0)    4},JSi 

5  >  (D  V 
o  cs  a  ^ 


GO aopq    n 


|S(^ 


hKco 


fc 

o 
u 

o, 

e 

"C" 

-as 


bO- 

:2i 


<4 

01 


1 


(    IxxvU    ) 


=3t     ^ 


-3-0 


a 
■<« 


•0 
«? 

a 


I 


J4 


.id 


'X- 


o. 


,■3 


»:S  --fP 


a 


I 


1 


5- 


u 


e 


-D    #    B    u    » 


5f^ 


3i  e 


-I 


•V 


o 
.9 


-ClJ 

0 


ft 


■S 
rS-c 


<i 


""I 


Ktf  «Ct  *»(^ 


^  "^  <> 


a 
-o 


■S: 


a^-ae 


« 

'-0 

a-? 


tA 

a 

s 


-«!:? 


I. 

I* 


¥ 


-4» 


■ 

•a 

.£3 


bfl 


V  0) 


-o  if 

•«  •«» -^i -S  !5* 


^     "2 


S 


^  •<*  J^d 


^ 


«4 


:-«« 


9J    Y    ->    OC  ' 

6-4>    CT  B  "Oi  -3 
M  <A  -:s  J4  .a 


-  ,J;<!  ^  -nJ -O  "H 


en  a. 
®  o 


O 


.<^^< 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I^|2j8     125 

■so    "^" 


I 


2.2 


I.I 


■u  lii 

£  Hi 


11=  —  — 

^ 

5//  

► 

<^ 


Am 


^5. 


'/ 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Ck)rporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)872-4503 


) 


(   Ixxviii   ) 


03 


0 


1 


s 
4 

I 

I 

s 
1 

•V 

e 

"Su 

a 
"a 

f 

1 

! 

I 


J3 


•? 


bfl 


I- 

s 


a| 


c 


»3 


i 


:§ 


-o-o 


•9i 


(A 


at  a       w 


¥3  S 


-9      «? 

<«  Kit 


I 


-0-6  ^ 


I 


-8 


i   «3 


•a 


<)  5  ~  T^  ■«!>  "Cl    «, 


1^ 


t 


1^    ^ 


•«« 


a  a 

9  a 

•etf  •<« 


^^ 


■^:5 


3a-§'^=3'a-g-2. 


Su  OB 


a 


1^1  1 

^      Kd      «« 


ti-6  a 


•  ^  "5  -(U  •«•  -rt    O"  • 


i  ^ 


B 

V 


3 


V 


i 
1^ 


S 
I 


s 


1 
9 

1 

VOCABULARY  OF  INDIAN  LANGUAGES.        Ixxix 

F&te,  f&r,  fUl,  f&t ; — in£,  in£t ; — pine,  pin  |— n6,  mdve,  ndr,  n6t,  &c. 

Having  but  a  $mall  nunUier  of  words  of  the  two  following  Lan- 
guagea,  it  w  thought  proper  to  insert  them  separately  from  the 
above  comparative  tableSf  in  order  that  the  columns  may  not  be  too 
much  extended. 

Shd8-h6-n^  Language. 


Good,  s&nt 

Bad,  k&t£4&nt 

Salmon,  ku-^ 

Come,  ki'ttSi 

Large,  pi-Ap 

Big  river,  pau-pe-up 

To  eat,  bd-r^&n 

White  people,  Hb-bk-bd—people 

of  the  sun 
Go,  n&-m£-&-r& 
To  copulate,  t6-cA 
To  see,  m&-bo*ni 
Did  not  gee  it,  k&<4n*m&-U-ni 
To  love,  kdm-mAh 
A  great  many,  ah&nt 
Bison,  kdt-zo 


Antelope,  w&-r£ 

Elk,  p&.r£ 

Awl,  w4-ft 

Beaver,  hk-nlsh 

Friend,  h&nts 

Woman,  wlpi 

Water,  p& 

Horse,  b£ink-6 

No,  kA-hi 

T&8h-i-p&,  pierced  nose  a  nation 
of  the  CMtimbia 

PiiW'kees,  Uack  feet  Indians 

PAn-&sh,  root  eaters — a  band  of 
Shoshones  who  call  a  horse  td- 
Ish,  and  a  squaw  m^«6-n£ 


Up-s&-rd-k&,  or  Crow  Language. 


White  people,  m&sh-t4-s4-r6— yrf- 

low  eyes, 
Fawkees  or  Black-feet,  £-chlp-£-t& 
Poor,  bits-lsh-c&t 
Powerful  or  strong,  b&ts-&t8h 
Good,  ^-tschlck 
Bad,  k{U>4)«4k 
Bison,  b^h& 
Bison  bull,  chi-ri-pA 
Beaver,  bi-dlp-p& 
Tobacco,  6-p& 
Where,  sh6 
Far,  h&m-&-t& 
Mountain,  im4-th&-bi 
Elk,  ^-cht-r^-ck-iA— little  hwse 
Finished  or  completed,  k&r-&-k6- 

tftk 


Knife,  mlt-s£ 

What,  s4-p4 

Near,  kahAak 

Friend,  sh£-k& 

To  eat,  b&-boush-m£k 

Gunpowder,  b£-rAps-8p& 

Little,  ^i^-k&-t4 

Name   which  they  give  to  the 

Sioux  nation,  m&r-dn-}:i^6-blsh- 

kA— or  the  cut  throats 
Young  woman,  m£-k&-tA 
Water,  m£-n£ 
Fire,  b«  d& 
Wood,  mdn-& 
River,  &n-8h& 
Horse,  £-ch£-r& 
No,b&r-&-t& 


Uxx         VOCABULARY  OF  INDIAN  LAN6UA0ES. 


F4te,  f&r,  (k\\,  fit ; — mi,  mii  ;<— pine,  pin  }— 

T%€  following  promiscuous  words  are  aided  for  the  further  informa- 
tion of  the  philologist. 

W&h-t6Ic-t&-t&,  or  Oto  Language. 


Wliite  people,  mki.-6nk-kii-^ron 
.  makers 
Americans,     mi"h6-hin-j41>— *% 

knife 
British,  r&-g&r-r^1i-ing,  proliably 

not  an  Oto  word 
loway  nation, pi-li6-j4—|^ay«noir 
Missouri    nation,    nfi-6-ti-tcli4 — 

those  who  build  a  town  at  the 

mouth  of  a  river 
Mississippi  river,  nfi-A-hAn-j6— ffce 

tiver  that  enlarges  as  it  runs,  or 

n£-b£r-4-^^,  water  of  knowledge 
Missouri  river,  n6-sii-j4— ^mofcy 

water 
Osage  river,  ni-Ah — white  water 
Grand  river,  nish-ni-hftn^A— Wg- 

water 
Konzes  river,    t6-p6-A-ki — good 

potatoe  river 
Nodowa  river,  n^-k-t6n-v/k—jump 

over  rtfcr,  or  n^-wi-t6n 
Walk,  mi-n6 
Distant,  hkr-r& 
Deer,  t4h-ch6 
Green,  t6h-tsch6 
Platte  river,  n£-bris-k4 — or  fiat 

water 
Little  Platte  river,  ni-br^ski-ing- 

y4 — little  flat  water 
Tarkio  river,  t4r-k6-i 
Nemehaw  river,  nA-mA-hi-hin-gfi 
Little  Nemehaw  river,  nd-mo-hi- 

ing-yi 
Nishnabatona  river,  nish-ni-bdt- 

6n4 — canoe  making  river 
Weeping  water  river,  n6-h4-g4— 

weeping  water 
Saline  creek,  n^s-co— soft  water 
Loup  fork  of  the  Platte  river, 

Pawneeomawhaw-n£-£tow-w4 


Elkhorn  creek,  w&-t&-tAng-y& 
Konza  river,  Konza-n£-itow-w4~ 

or  the  river  belonging  to  the 

Konxas 
Run,  n6ng-& 
Leap,  t4-w4 
Fight,  &-k&-r&-g4 
Eat,  w&-rd-j& 
Drink,  r4t-t6ng 
Steal,  m6-n6 
Talk,  «-ch4 
Strength,  brd-hr4 
Weakness,  w4-h&-h4  . 
Poor,  wi-w48-t6ng 
Near,  &s-ki 
Different,  Min-t^ng 
Good,  pi-4y 
Bad,  plsh-c6-n4 
Mockeson,  4-k6-j£ 
Gunpowder,  &k-hd-j£ 
Ball,  m&-z4-mAh 
LooluDff-glasSk  m&-z6-k4-t6Ji-4 
Long,  tnr4-j4 
Short,  sJi-is>ch4 
Broad,  &r-r<i-ch4'b6n>-j4 
Thick,  8h6-ga 
Thin,  br4-k4 
Father,  In-k6— user  u  person 

when    addressing       ,    father. 

This  word  is  saidby  Lewisand 

Clarke,  p.  36,  to  mean  chief, 

but  this  seems  to  be  a  mistake. 
Twenty,  kr4-b4-n{ih-n6-w4 
Twenty-OE  e,  krabanuhnowa-&-gSn' 

n6-yon-k4? 
Thirty,  krabanuh-t&-B£ 
One  hundred,  krabanuh-h6-y6Dg 
One  hundred  and  one,  kraDanuh- 

hoyongagenneyonka 
One  thousand,  xrabanuhhoyong- 

hdn-j4— or  big  hundred 


i 


riforma- 


iw-wA — 
f  to  tht 


VOCABULARY  OP  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


Izxxi 


I 


i 


Utti-ii 


'A  person 
father, 
lewis-and 
in  chief, 
mistake. 

va-&-gdn* 


rabanul 


jhoyong- 


— n6,  mdve,  nAr,  n6t^— tiibe,  tiib,  Mill ;— 611 ;— p66nd. 
O-m&w-h&w  Language. 


Wliite  people,  vrhh-hk—nnakera 
Americans,  mkh-hi-tAn-gAh — big 

knife 
British,  sAk-^-&ah— not  a  proper 

Omawhaw  word 
Hat,  w&-h&-p&-g&-r6n^ 
Hatchet,  mdz-z&-p&-|jin-gA 
Axe,  in^z-z&-p&>t&n-g«kh 
Prairie  dog's  burrow,  m&n-n£-thd- 

Grizzly  bear,  mon-tschA 

"White  hare,  mis-tschl-ski 

Porcupine,  p&-h£ 

Bald  eagle,' J|6-r&-p&-s6ng 

Grey  eagle,  n6-r&-Kr4-|j6 

Black  bear,  w&-s&4)i 

Dragon  fly,  tfi-nfi-nik-i 

Sword,  m&h-h£-tAn-gAh 

Small  knife,  mkh-h^-tjiQ-g^h 

Canoe,  ni6n-d& 

Thunder,  tg^r-r6ng 

Breech-cloth,  ±jA-C-di-gir-r6ng 

Niece,  wfi-t6-tjeh  by  the  men,  w6- 
td-:^j6n-s&  by  the  squaws 

Brother-in-law,  ti-*hong 

Deer  skin,  tk-hk 

Sweet  maize,  wfi.t-tin-zd-sk6-r4 

Common  maize,  w&t-t^n-zS-s&r- 
ri-gi 

An  ear  of  maize,  w&-h&-b& 

Abdomen,  ik-z& 

Paunch  or  stomach,  n£-h& 

Mammee,  m6n-z&,  same  as  iron 

People,  n£-k&-shing-g4,  or  n6-kflh- 
shing-gdh 

Young  warrior,  wi-s^-s6-g4 

Warm,  m&sh-ti 

Nostrils,  p&h-sh6-sh& 

Human  skin,  h£-hd 

Deep  blue,  tfih-che 

Dance,  w4t-che.  Sometimes  tlie 
word  gk-hk,  to  make,  is  sub- 
joined to  this  word  in  order  to 
distinguish  from  their  terra  for 
copulation 

His  child,  «^-n«i-s(- 


Me  ([)  make,  p&-th4,  very  like  the 

word  for  hill 
My  true  child,  w£-s£4jAn-t8ch£- 

nfl 
It  is  said  there  is  none,  ning-gA-Am 
Bad  or  ugly,  pMj^'^h — a  word  used 

in   anger,   principally  by   the 

squaws 
Poor  as  a  turkey,  w&h-p&-n£-z£- 

z£-kd-&-g6 
I  am  as  poor  as  a  turkey,  &-m&h- 

panczezekaago 
You  are  as  poor  as  a  turkey,  w4r- 

Ichpanezezekaago 
It  was  red  with  blood,  wi-m£-l  i£- 

ilk-kk 
I  will  not  go,  &-br&-mdjt-f  j£ 
Come  here,  g£-g&-h& 
Little  Platte   river,    nd-brls-k&- 

\]in^\i— 'Little  flat  water 
Konza  river,  Konza-n^-£td 
Bowyer  creek,  n^-hd-ba — shallow 

water 
Little  Sioux  creek,  w&-td 
Run,  td-n4 
Leap,  w£-s4 
Fight,  k6-k*-n4 
Eat,  wi-br4t-ta 
Drink,  brilt-t6ng 
Steal,  m6-n6 
Talk,  ^-k,  very  like  stone 
Strength,  w&sn-c&-tdn-g& 
Weakness,  wi-h4-h4 
Poor,  w4h-p4-nS 
Near,  dsh-k4 
Good,  6-d6ng 
Bad,  o-don^-buj|-:|3e,  or  d-d4n-|j£, 

or  p6-&-Jj4 
Mockeson,  *h4n-p4 
Gunpowder,  m4h-th6-d4 
Ball,  n)4h-z4-mAh 
Lookingglass,  n£-6-k£-g4rras-s^ 
Long,  sn4-d4 
Short,  ch4-shk4h 
Broad,  brd3-k4 
Thick,  sho-gdh 


Ixxxii       VOCABULARY  OF  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


F&te,  f&r,  f&U,  fdt ; — mi,  in£t ; — pine,  pin ; — 


Thin.  br&.k& 

Thirteen,  &>fi;&r-£-r&-bd-n£ 
Twenty,  krS-b4-r4-n6m-b4 
Twenty-one,  krabaranoinba-ki-d£- 

m£-&ch-ch£ 
Thirty,  krabara-M-n& 
Thirty-one,  krabarabene-k^-di-m^- 

&ch-chd 


One  hundred,  krabara-h£-m£ 
One  hundred  and  one,  krabarahe- 

nie-k£-d£-m£-&ch-Ghi 
One  thousand,  krabaraheme-t6n-g& 
One  thousand  and  one,  krabarahe- 

metonga-kedemeachche 
Nine  thousand,  krabarahemeton- 

ga-sh6n-k& 


0>m&w-h&w  Names  of  Persons. 


Yellow  Belly,  t&-z£-z£ 

Little  God,  w&h-cdndMjln-g& 

God,  w&h-cdnd& 

He  that  carries  his  feet,  sd-eA-d 

He  that  has  four  feet,  8M6-b& 

Four  hands,  nAm-b&-t6-b& 

Two  legjs,  |j&-f^-n6m-b& 

Four  nails,  sh&-s&-td-b& 

Big  hand,  ndmM-tAn-g& 

Big  eyes,  Ish-ti-tdn-g^ 

He  who  deliberates,   w4-r&-g£r- 

r6ng 
BuiTaloe  rib,  t&-r£-t& 
Buffaloe  tail,  td-sin-d4 
Buftaloe  head,  td-pli 
Buffaloe  bull,  t&-nJi-gi 
Buffaloe  calf,  t&-|jin-gi 
Little  white  bear,  n){it-chu-|  jingd 
Black  white  bear,  m{it-chA-sa-b& 
Black  bird,  wk-|jlnga-s4-b& 
He  that  walks  on  the  edge,  6-h6n- 

g4-m6n-£ 
He  that  makes  signs  as  he  walks, 

wk-b6m-Sn-6 
He  that  walks  behind,  k-gk-hk- 

m6-n£ 
He  that  hunts  as  l.s  walks,  6-nk- 

miin-ni 
The  walking  cloud,  mlkh-p£-mdn- 

n£ 
The  strong  walker,  w&sh-ki-mdn- 

n« 
He  who  walks  when  fruit  is  ripe, 

8£-d&-mAn-n£ 
He  who  cries  as  he  walks,  hk-gk- 


He  who  walks  beyond  others,  kd- 

sh£-h&-mAn-n£ 
He  who  arrived  in  haste,  w&sh- 

c6n-h£ 
He  who  is  not  afraid  qf  tracks,  si- 

gr&-n&-p&-UL         • 
The  white  horse,  shdn-g&-8k& 
Seven,  p&-ndm-M 
Ace  of  spades,  6-k&-d£-g4-r6ng 
Little  cook,  6-4i6n-^in-g& 
Head  wind  or  North  wind,  k£- 

mk-hk 
Big  skunk,  mdn-g&-tdn-g& 
Prairie  wolf,  m6n-£-kAs-s£ 
Swan,  m£-hds-cd-tAn-g& 
He  who  walks  double,  ndm-bi- 

m6n-ni 
Black  breast,  mdn-gi-s&b-b^ 
No  hand,  ndm-bi-nlng-gi 
Brave,  w&-shA-sh& 
No  knife,  m&-h£-nlng-g& 
Two  tails,  sln-d&-nAm-b& 
The  top  of  the  tent-poles  which 

are  tied  together,  t£-sh£-m6-h&. 
Big  bullet,  ma-zi-rndt-tAngd 
Medicine  mouth,  £-w&-h6-b& 
He  who  carries  real  medicines, 

mkC'Ck-n-& 
Wet  mockeson,  h6m-p&-nd-cil 
Big  leggings,  6-t&nt-tAn-g& 
Smoke  maker,  shii-d&-s6cn-h& 
Two  faces,  in-d&-n6m-D& 
The  twins,  ndm-bi-d&nt 
Yellow  knife,  mk-h^-zj^ 

SqUAWS'  NAMES. 

The  first  moon,  mM&-£ 
Ni-s^-zd  * 


^ 


VOCABULARY  OF  INDIAN  LANGUAGES.       Ixuiii 


-n6,  mdve,  n6r,  n6t ;— tAbe,  tAb,  bAIl  f—6\\  ;~p6{ind. 


Village,  towoin 

M«-hdn-gdh 

First  thunder,  ti-in-i 

Female  sun,  m£-t£h-h& 

Female  moon,  m£-Am-bdn-n£ 


Female  axe,  m&8-Ap-p4-m£ 
Female  deer  that  looks,  w&-tAm- 

bAn-n£ 
The  first  thunder  that  falls,  t&-lng- 


O-m&w-h&w  Interjections  and  Exclamations. 


Zt!—* This  is  used  by  the  men 
when  contemplating  a  fine  trin- 
ket, looking-glass,  &c.;  they 
sometimes  say  zt-A-d&h ! 

Sh£h-zt-zt-zt!  orwah-zt-zt-zt!  or 
dah-zt-zt-zt!  is  used  by  the  men 
for  driving  dogs  out  of  mis- 
chief. 

3 

Eh-zt-zt-zt-zt!  by  the  women  on 

.   the  same  occasion. 

H£h !  an  inspirations-used  by  the 
women  when  a  sudden  but  tri- 
fling accident  occurs — as  it  is 
also  used  by  the  white  fe- 
males. 

K£-&!— the  first  syllable  nasal — 
by  the  women  for  calling  their 
dop. 

W6-6h!  by  the  men  for  calling 
their  dogs  or  horses.  It  is  a 
sound  very  similar  to  that  used 
by  the  whites  to  halt  horses. 


W&h-m&n-g&r-ing-g&!  Be  off,  or 
go  away — spoken  in  anger — this 
would  be  the  last  word,  an  at- 
tack would  succeed  if  disre- 
garded. 

0-h4h!  (drawn  out  very  long) 
used  to  one  who  has  been  trou- 
bling them  a  long  time^t 
would  precede  the  preceding 
exclamation  in  the  gradation  of 
displeasure. 

Gd-g&-h&!  w&h-g£-g&-r&!  6.h6h-g«- 
g&r-^!— the  successive  expres- 
sions of  impatience  in  calling  a 
person  to  come. 

Hi-6 !  The  answer  of  a  squaw  to 
one  who  calls. 

H& !  1  he  answer  of  a  man  to  one 
who  calls. 

D&-d&nsh-t&-^ !  An  exclamation 
similar  in  signification  to  0,tUas, 
me! 


1$ 

ixxxiv       VOCABULARY  OF  INDIAN  LANGUAGES. 


F&te.  f&r,  f4l1,  f&t|— m^  m^t;— pine,  pin;— 
Sioux,  (Yancton  band,)  Language. 


no 


American,  m£-n&-h&s-h&h— Xion^ 
knife 

British,  8&-ktn-<l&-sh&.    This  ap- 
pears to  be  an  adopted  word. 

Physician,  w&-p£-&-w£-&-ch&-ah& 

Village,  A-tAng-y-ft 

Eagle,  hdy&h 

Green,  t6.wi-t6v-yA,  or  "  tlie  blue 
to  dye  with" — they  have 
other  word  for  this  colour 

Warm,  m&ch-t4 

Pawnees,  p4-diln-A>tiL 

Sioux,  d&-c6-t& 

Run,  £-6ng-k& 

Leap,  £-£p-8£-sh&, 

Fight,  k£-chd-z& 

Eat,  w6-t&h 

Drink,  y4-t&-k6ng 

Talk,  h-k\\ 

Good,  w^sh-t& 

Gunpowder,  ch&-hi!in-d4 


Thirteen,  &-k&-y&-mi-ni 
Nineteen,  &-k&-nAh-pit-chi^wdnr 
Twenty,  wek-chem-in-eh-nom-pan 
Twenty-one,    wekcheminehnom- 

pah-a-k&-6ng-g^ 
Thirty,  wekcheminuh-y&-m£-n£ 
Thirty-one,  wekcheminuhyamene- 

a-ka-6ng-4iin 
One  hundred,  6-pllng-h& 
One  hundred  and  one,  opangha-&- 

k&-6ng-|jin 
One  thousand,  kuk-6-tAng-6-pling- 

\ik 
One  thousand  and  one,  kokotong- 

opangha-&-k4-6ng-|jin 
Ten  thousand,  kokotongopangha- 

wekcheminuh 

The  upper  bands  of  the  SUoux 
in  their  pronunciation  substitute 
the  letter  I  for  the  <{. 


M}n-n£-t&-r£,  or  Gros  ventre  Language. 


American,  min-cd-ich-t4-it — Big 

fcHifa 
Britii,  b6-sh^-it-td  -tchrd-shd-pi- 

s)\i—-the  men  who  bring  black 

cloth 
French,  bA-sh^ 

Spaniard,  w&s-sh£-6-mdn-ti-qu& 
Crow  Indians,  p&r-is-c&-6h-p&n-g& 

-—the  crow  people 
Crow  Indians,  another  band,  ih- 

\ik-tzii—4he  people  of  leaves 
Snake  Indians,  m^-bfic-sho-rdch- 

p&n-g& 
Flat-lieaded  Indians,  &-too-h&-p^ 
Pierced-nose  Indians,  &-p&-6-p& 
Black  foot  Indians,  It-j^d-dili-p^- 

sh& 
Gros  ventre  of  the  Fort  prairie,  a 

band  of  Black  feet,  &-rM£&r-6- 

p&n-gi 


Assinniboin  Indians,  ^-t&ns-k£-p&- 

s£-t&-qui 
Shienne  Indians,   &-w&s-sh£-tdn- 

quS,  or  it-ins6-p6-|j6 
Sauteur  Indians,  na-hdt-tdng 
Mandan  Indians,  &-r&ch-b6-cA 
Rickaree  Indians,  &-rkk-i-r&-6n6 
Sioux  Indians,  it-&ns-k£ 
Pawnee  Loups  Indians,  s&-tj£r-6- 

p&n-gi 
Les  Noire  Indians,  it-t£-shA-p£- 

sh&-16h-p&n-g& 
The  Red  Shiefd  Chief,  one  of  the 

principal  chiefs,  6-tdm-ini-g£h- 

iss-sh& 
The  Borgne  or  One  Eye,  grand 

chief,  a  remarkable  man,  he  was 

killed  by  the  Red  Shield,  a  few 

years  since,  kk-k6-d-kis 


* 


t 


VOCABULARY  OF  INDIAN  LANGUAGES.        Ixsxv 


— nA,  indye,  nAr»  ii6t ;— >t6be,  tAb,  b6U  ^~6II ) — pAAnd. 


Missouri  river,  &*inlnti<4-j|j£ — the 

river  that  carries  eanote 
Little  Missouri  river,  &-inAntl-c&- 

|j&— <A0  river  that  tarries  little 

eanoea 
Yellow  Stone  River,  inIt-z£-r£-&- 

\^h—4he  river  ofydhw  rocks 
Physician,  mAt-z4<in&-h6-pft 
Vitla^,  &-in&-tih 
Praine,  &'m6n-8{i<k£t 
Eagle,  Ich-pr^lch 
Arrow  point,  i-t&h-4 
Tomahawk,  wMp4&-l&n-g& 
Green,  th&tt-td-gi 
Emasculation,  to-jA-cA-d&>tiu8 
Little  wolf,  Mt-sis 
Blanket,  w&8h-4-«chr«-d.tAck£ 
Mountain,  ivihck-y^ 
Kill,  t&-h&      * 
Die,  tia 
Scalp,  ft-r&m-pMs&k-ki 


He  or  she,  nt 

Bison  cow,  mi-t^-yi 

A  thick  forest  of  small  trees,  b^- 

r&-sh£-^-p6 
Run,  ti-ri-k 
Leap,  ti-chri 
Fight,  r£-k« 
Eat,  m&-rdu-tA 
Drink,  b£-d£-h« 
Steal,  m&-&>8h&n-ri 
Talk,d«-d& 
Mockasin,  6-p&h 
Gunpowder,  mdr-£-z£-b& 
Nineteen,  &-p£-nA-w&84&p-p& 
Twenty,  n6'H&.p^h>p^-r&-gft8 
Thirty,  n&-m^-pd«r&-g&s 
Forty,  tA-p&h-&-p£-r&>K&s 
One  nundred,  p4-r&-gai9-lch-t£4t 
One  thousand,  p£-rd'^s-lch-t£<£t- 

&-c&h-c6-r£ 


•     * 


P&w-ni  Language. 


Grand  Pawnees,  tch&-w£ 

Loups  or  Pawneeomawhaws,8ki-r£ 

Pawnee  Republicans,  'i^-kk-kh.  or 

ka-ki-kdsh 
Tappage  band,  p&-t6{i-w£-r& 
Not,  bflH-*jA 
Tool  Robe,  (the  republican  grand 

chief,)  8ha-r£-i-a££ksh-t&w-w£ 
Thirteen,  t66.wdt-16k-8h6.r6 
Fourteen,  l&h-k6-kM& 
Fifteen,  sh«-dksh-t&-r6-k£.t& 
Sixteen,  8hr6<i-w6-6 
Seventeen,  tAA-w£t-k^-ki,  (twenty 

less  three) 
Eighteen,  p£t-kd-k&*k£,  (twenty 

less  two) 
Nineteen,   &8-kd-k&-k6,  (twenty 

less  one) 
Twenty,  pe-tA6-6 
Twenty-one,  petouo-is-kd 


Thirty,  lftk*h4.r4-w^t66-A 
Thirty-one,  luksherewetouo^asko 
Forty,  p£t-kA-sh6-A-r&-rd 
Forty-one,  petkoshooraro-as-ko 
Fifty,  petkoshoorarolokshere 
Sixty,  t^a-wdt-ra-rd 
Seventy,  touwetraroloksherr 
Seventy -one,  tonwetrarolokb! »  i\' 

askolokshere 
Eighty,  shke-tiksh-ti-rd 
Eighty-one,  shketikshtaroasko 
Ninety,  shketikshtarolokshere 
Nine<:y-one,  shketikshtaroaskolok- 

shere 
One  hundred,  8hi-kdksh-t&-rA 
One  thousand,  petkoshoorarolok- 

shere-tsi-^ksn 
The  name  of  one  individual  of 

the  Pawnee  Loups  is  '*  The 

maker  of  God." 


Vol.  II. 


M 


« 

Izxxvi       VOCABULARY  OF  INDIAN  LAN0UA0E8.  # 

FAte,  f&r,  fill,  f4t  j— mi,  mCt )— nine,  pin  j— 

The  two  following  Voealndarie$  to«rg  taktn  down  by  Major  Long 
during  hi$  tour  on  t(u  upper  JUihimppi  in  the  year  1817. 


Winnebago,  Puant,  or  Nip. 

NaudoweMiet  of  Carver  and 

pegon. 

Hennepin. 

Arm 

&r.d&h 

Ish-t6 

Axe 

m&ha 

6nts-pA 

Arrow 

m&h 

wUi-hin.ti-pA 

American  or  > 

Long  knife  5 
Brother 

m&h^k-h&-t« 

U-s6n-t&h-k&h 

s6nk-h&-dih 

m£-s6n-k&h 

Beads 
Bread 

wy-&-pir-rls-sipe 

wIcA-Wp 

n&h-&-p&h 

w«-A.ki^-t&h 
&h.hd-«4-p« 

Beaver 

sch&h-p&h 
w&h-h&nk-c«-chUi 

Bear 

Antsh 

Brass  orcopper 

m&hn-si 

m&hnz*&-z£ 

Chief 

6ngk-p£ 

wlch-Ash-t&h-y&h-tAp'pi— 
good  chief 

Canoe  or  boat 

w&ch 

wih-t4      * 

Cards,  playing 

p£k 

Ske<h«-6.p&h 

Child 

nA-ffA-nik 

Dead 

&h-nd 

kth&h 

Deer 

tch&h 

t&h-k£n.sh&h 

Dog 

shAnk 

8h6nk-&h 

Elk 
Elbow 

snUb-s6 

d-p&ngh 
Ish-p&h 

Eyes 

lsh.t&h 

Ears 

n&hnt-sh66-ih 

n6kh-r& 

Feet 

a& 

si-h&h 

Fingers 

n&-&p 
ch&-6ntz-sln-c£r-it 

n6.p&.t6-k&-h&h 

Fox 

8h6nk-gr£-d&h 

Fire 

pychi 

ch&-ch£ 

pA-t&h 
&h-t& 

Father 

Face 

A-pA-n4               * 
d4^-klsh.k£ 

&-iA 

Good 

yrkth-tk. 

Garter 

w&8h-kln-ch&h-h4 

Gun     ' 

Ish-dk 

m\hs-&k-kb&n 

Ground 

m&k-k&h 

m&h-k6h-ch& 

Green 

m&h>n£ch-6 

t&h-k6-t£ 

Grass 

kh&h-w«h 

pA-zhi 

Hands 

n&h-fdr 

nA-pi 

Head 

n&hs-sd 

F&lU 

Heart 

n&ch-kih 

chin-U 

House  or  lodge 

tch£ 

ti-pA 
8h6nk-&.w&k-kiingk 

Horse 

shdnk-h&t.t& 

Island 

wich 

w6-tih 

Iron 

m&hs4sh-&h 

m&hnz-&h 

% 


VOCABULARY  OF  INDIAN  LANGUA0K8.       IxxxtU 


— nA,  mdvef  n6r,  ii6t  >— t^ibe,  tdb,  b6U  |— 4U ;— p6And. 


p.p6— 


•A    A 


Winnebago,  Puant,  or  Nip> 

NaudoweMiei  of  Carver  and 

pegon. 

Hennepin. 

Indian 

w&nk-shlch 

Ik-«<h4-wlch-4sh^ , 

knife 

m&h-h« 

«t^Dh 

Lead 

Uh-d-c6-in&h 

mihnz-ft»«d 

Legs 

d-rlh 

hd 

Louae 

hA-dUi 

h&h-yAr 

Maize 

w&-GhA4f 

w&h-mi-n&h-sAh 

Man 

w&nk^«^&h 

wlch-H-t&h 

Mother 

nU)-n« 

«-n&h 

Muaket 

•h6A4ck 

8ln-t«-pAh              ^ 

Meat 

tch&ck 

tdn-dA                   % 

Meal 

wdis'tAp 
wi-cd-cMli 

Ah4)d^.Ap.p6 

Mockasin 

h&mH>&h 

Moon 

h&h-h«h.wi 

wd? 

Mouth 

« 

i? 

Mosquetto 

n&h-w6nk 

ch&h-p6n<fl[&h 
h6-y4h 

No,  or  nothing 

chAnch-qu^n£-n6 

Nose 

p&h 

p4gh.r4             .          - 

Oar,  or  paddle 

n&sh-Ack 

w&-m£-n&h-h«-ch&h 

Old 

&h-chln-shAn 

wlch-&-hln-ch&h,  old  num 

Otter 

t6-ah«n-Ak 

ptAngh 
Ungh.k&h-h&h 

Owl 

w&hk^h£h-h£ 

Powder 

6k-hiin.n6 

ch&h-hAn-d« 

Pond  or  lake 

t&h-h&t-ta 

min-d&i  or  t6ng-gUr 

Porcupine 

w&h-h&ne 

Pipe 

tih.n6-h6                       • 

ch&n-dd-d-p&h 

Road 

n&h-kdh 

ch&ng-kd 

River 

ni^h&n-nilk 

w&h.t£.p&h 

Red 

w&s-sdh 

sh&h 

Sister 

ndk-&ch-&p-pd-t&h 

tdnk^hi 

Silver 

shdMlA^h 

m&nzr&s-k&h 

Squaw 

h^-nd-kd-t&h 

wln-6-kh£-j&h 

Sun 

w^-d&h 

w4? 

Star 

k&h-d&ch-& 

wlch-&nck-p£ 

Thunder 

w&h-k«n-jUi 

w&k.k«-&h 

Tree 

n&h-n&h 

ch&h 

TownorviI.> 
lage         5 
Tobacco 

m&h-ka-t£-ch£<nAk 

&h-tAng-w& 

• 

t&h-n^-n&h 

ch&n-d6 

Teeth 

hi 

*?    . 

Universe 

h&n-n&jh-pd 

&h-w§is-8£ 

Wax 

i-slc-w£-k£-u£-ch&h 

tdk-m&h-h&h-sds^n-di 

White 

sk&h 

sk&h 

Water 

n^-n&h,  or  n^h 

min-n£h 

You 

n&'gh 

nfi-yA 

«    • 


•«   IzmlU     VOCABULARY  OF  INDUN  LANOUAOU. 


I,  pin  I— n6,  BiAvt)  lie. 


*-. 


WUiMbafO,  PuMit,  or  Mip> 

llMdowtMics  of  Cuver  mmI 

pcgon. 

H«nn«pln. 

Y«i, 

6n^Ah 

hlh 

Om 

jhlnc-k«-d« 

win-ch&h 

Two 

n6rii.pUi 

ThrM 

ah-n« 

vAhnnin^ni 

Four 

cMpt 

UAi-A^ 

Five        . 

t&ch 

■hUik-p« 

■hUkJ^wln 

ih3IhAn^l&4)&h 

8lx 

kAh-wi 
ahA.kA 

Seven 

m 

nA'WAnk 

ihlnk-lch.dK6-n« 

khir«A-pAn 

jhlnk-h«-r&^6-n6 

n6p>ckMi-wAnk-k&h 

Ten 

w«^«-chA-m«.nUi 

Eleven 

&k-kA-wAn-^ 

Twelve 

n6p«-«ih'6-ni 

•k444iAm6 

ft 


flip 


m 


# 


-r 


r^ 


kc.     ' 


inrer  and 


